May 1984
       v-.'.--»- > A
       H > C ^
       -1 3 l« „! V
      ^i r* * /%, -
   i^v;-.^'
,^
A REGIONAL-SCALE (1000 KM) MODEL OF PHOTOCHEMICAL AIR POLLUTION
            Part 2.   Input Processor  Network Design
           ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES RESEARCH LABORATORY
               OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
              U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK, NC 27711

-------
A REGIONAL-SCALE (1000 KM)  MODEL OF PHOTOCHEMICAL  AIR  POLLUTION
            Part 2.   Input  Processor Network Design
                         Robert G.  Lamb
              Meteorology and Assessment Division
           Environmental  Sciences Research Laboratory
         Research Triangle Park, North Carolina   27711
           ENVIRONMENTAL SCIENCES RESEARCH LABORATORY
               OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT
              U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY
                RESEARCH TRIANGLE PARK,  NC 27711

-------
                              NOTICE

This  document   has  been   reviewed   in  accordance   with  U.S.
Environmental   Protection   Agency   policy   and   approved   for
publication.   Mention  of trade names or  commercial  products does
not constitute endorsement or recommendation for use.

-------
                                    PREFACE

     After  the model  described  in Part  I of  this  report was  formulated,  a
draft of  an  instruction manual  was rather  hastily  prepared to guide computer
programmers  in  the  task of transforming the theory into an operational model.
The  present  report, Part  2,  evolved  from  that manual.   The  purpose of this
document  goes   beyond  that of  an  instruction  manual, however.   The broader
objective is to provide in conjunction with Part 1 of detailed description of
what we regard as EPA's first-generation regional oxidant model.

     In attempting  to  use  science as a tool for treating the types of applied
problems  that  are  of  concern to  the  EPA, one  is  not allowed the luxury of
simplifying  assumptions that  reduce  problems  to  forms that  possess concise
elegant solutions.  Instead, one must face the harsh realities of the physical
world  and search  for  approximate descriptions of  phenomena  that  strike an
acceptable compromise  between scientific rigor and practicability.  Just what
constitutes  an  "acceptable"  compromise in this case is a subjective judgement
that each person must make for himself.  In my view, several of the techniques
presented in this report represent compromises that are not wholly acceptable,
but they must suffice for now because time constraints dictate  that we move on
to the  task  of model testing.  Hopefully,  the  flexibility that we have built
into the  basic  framework of the model will foster efforts by others to expand
and  improve  upon the  work we have done;" and  a second  generation model will
emerge significantly better than the model presented here.

                                                  R.G. Lamb
                                                  November 1983
                                      m

-------
                          ABSTRACT

     Detailed specifications are given for a network of data
processors and submodels that can generate the parameter fields
required by the regional oxidant model formulated in Part 1 of
this report.  Operations performed by the processor network in-
clude simulation of the motion and depth of the nighttime rad-
iation inversion layer; simulation of the depth of the convec-
tive mixed and cloud layers; estimation of the synoptic-scale
vertical motion fields; generation of ensembles of layer-aver--
aged horizontal winds; calculation of vertical turbulence fluxes,
pollutant deposition velocities, parameters for a subgrid-scale
concentration fluctuation parameterization scheme; and many
other functions.  This network of processors and submodels, in
combination with the core model developed in Part 1, represent
the EPA's first-generation regional oxidant model.
                           IV

-------
                                   CONTENTS


Preface 	  i i i
Abstract 	   i v
Figures 	 viii
Tab 1 es 	   xi
Acknowledgements 	 xi i i

     1.  Introduction 	    1
           General Discussion 	    1
           Summary of Processor Functions 	    5
             Processor PI 	    5
             Processor P2 	    5
             Processor P3 	    7
             Processor P4 	    7
             Processor P7	    7
             Processor P8 	    7
             Processor P9 	    7
             Processor P10 	    8
             Processor Pll 	    8
             Processor P12 	    8
             Processor P15 	    8
             BMC 	    8
           Summary of Model Equations 	    9
             Layer 1 	    9
             Layer 2 	   12
             Layer 3 	   14
             Layer 0 	   15

     2.  Processor PI 	   18
           General Discussion 	   18
             Step 1 	   18
             Step 2 	   19
             Step 3 	   20
             Step 4 	   20
             Step 5 	:	   21
             Step 6 	   21
             Step 7 	   22
             Step 8 	   23
             Step 9 	   23
             Step 10 	   24
             Stage INT 	   24

     3.  Processor P2 	   30
           General Discussion 	   30
             Stage LBC:  Estimating lateral boundary conditions
                         from monitori ng data 	   34

-------
                        CONTENTS (continued)


        Stage 1C:   Estimating initial conditions from
                    monitoring data 	   34
        Stage UBC:  Upper boundary conditions 	   36

4.  Processor P3	   39
      General Discussion 	   39
        Step 1	   39
        Step 2	   40
        Step 3 	   41
        Step 4 	   42
        Stage INT 	   42

5.  Processor P4	   46
      General Discussion 	   46
        Step 1 	   47
        Step 2 	   48
        Step 3 	   50
        Step 4	   51

6.  Processor P7	   56
      Motion of a viscous, hydrostatic fluid of constant
      density over irregular terrain 	 	   56
        The pressure force 	   58
        The fri cti on force 	   61
        The Coriolis force 	   65
        The momentum equations 	   65
        The fluid depth equation 	   67
        Simplified model equations 	   76
        Solution of the u, v, and z   equation 	   79
        Stage ZT 	Y?	   82
        Stage DELRO 	   83
        Stage ETA	   86
        Stage PCD	   89
        Stage IBC 	   91
        Stage H1HO 	   94
        Stage SIG	   95
        Stage FLOMOD 	   96
      Appendix A to Section 7 	  101
      Appendi x B to Secti on 7	  110
        Calculation of the BAR variables 	  120
        Calculation of the PRIME variables	  122
        Calculation of the dependent variables uX and h1 	  124

7.  Processor 8  	  131
      Introduction	  131
      Derivation of basic equations 	  131
        Stage ZQ  	  147
        Stage PATH 	  161
        Stage WEWC 	  165
        Stage W2	  172
                                 VI

-------
                        CONTENTS (continued)


        Stage WV 	  182
        Mode 0:   Apt=0 	  182
        Mode 1:   Api=l 	  185

8.   Processor P9 	  197
      Devel opment 	  197
        Stage DEN 	  197
        Stage ZEN 	  203
      Appendix to Section 8 	  195

9.   Processor P10 	  207
      Stage DELH 	  208
      Stage S 	  211
      Stage ZTA 	  214

10.  Processor Pll 	  219
      Summary 	  219
      Introduction 	  220
      Average horizontal winds in a layer bounded by two
      arbitrary pressure surfaces 	  222
        Stage UV11 	  247

11.  Processor P12 	  254
      Devel opment 	  254
        Stage K 	  254
        Stage WWO 	  261
        Stage WW1 	  264

12.  Processor P15 	  271
      Devel opment 	  271
        Step 1 	  271
        Step 2 	  275

13.  The B-Matrix Compiler 	  279
      Introduction 	  279
      The B-Matrix elements 	  280
      Preparation of terms in the F-equation 	  285
        Step 1 	  287
        Step 2 	  288
        Step 3 	  289
        Step 4 	  290
        Step 5	  290

References 	  296
                                 VI1

-------
                                   FIGURES

Number                                                                   Page

1-1       Schematic illustration of the regional  model  and the
          network of processors that supply it information 	     2

1-2       Modeling region in the NEROS study.   Each dot represents
          a grid cell 	     6

1-3       Illustration of Processor PI and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	    29

2-1       Illustration of Processor P2 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	    38

3-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P3  and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	    45

4-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P4  and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	 	    55

7-1       Illustration of the variables used in the flow model 	    57

7-2       Air parcel considered in the force balance analysis 	    58

7-3       Friction forces on a fluid parcel of horizontal dimensions
          (Ax,Ay) bounded by z   and z. 	    62

7-4       Projection of the horizontal rectangle  (Ax,Ay) onto the
          surface H   centered at point Q 	    69

7-2       Illustration of the 54 5 min x 5 min cells that are used in
          the calculation of z.(I,J) 	    83

7A-1      Illustration of the points used in the  numerical solution
          of Eq. 7A-1.  Circled grid points are those from which
          values f and S are taken to derive a biquintic expansion
          of F(x',tJ about the point (IST,JST) (see Eq. 7-49) 	   104
               *^*   n

7B-1      Flow chart of FIOMOD operations	   119

7B-2      Grid network on which p  , i  , $.> S  , S  , and S, are computed.
          Different spatial derivative operators   Ax and Ay are required
          in these calculations as indicated 	   122

7B-3      Illustration of the  southwest corner zone and the west and
          south boundary zones of the mode! domain 	   129

-------
                              FIGURES (Continued)

Number                                                                   Page

7-6       Schematic illustration of Processor P7 and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	   130

8-1       Illustration of surfaces H2 and H3 during situations in
          which convective clouds cover only a portion of the
          modeli ng regi on 	   132

8-2       Illustration of the air parcel trajectory that arrives at
          point x  at hour ti.   Point x' denotes the parcel's
          location at time t0 < tx .. .7.	   141

8-3       (a)  Idealized profiles of mixing ratio q and potential
               temperature 0 in dry,  convective conditions.
          (b)  Second derivatives of the profiles illustrated in
               panel a 	   150

8-4       Illustration of th points (dots) at which measurements of £
          are available; and the point z" at which a measure of d2£/dz2
          is desired.  Values of £ measured at the points z.,i=l,...4
          centered at z" are used to approximate £(z) in a polynomial
          about z" 	   151

8-6       Schematic illustration of Processor P8 and its input and
          output interfaces with the processor network 	   196

9-1       Schematic illustration of Processor P9 and its interfaces
          with the processor network 	   206

10-1      Illustration of the influence of terrain on model  layers 0,
          1 and 2 for given values of the penetration fractions crT1
          and aTQ 	..	   211

10-2      Schematic illustration of Processor P10 and its interfaces
          with the processor network 	   218

11-1      Surfaces bounding layer p in which M soundings of the
          horizontal wind are available on the bottom surface p
          of Layer p	   224

11-2      Illustration of Processor Pll and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	   253

12-1      Illustration of the superposition of five hypothetical
          realization of an ensemble of point source plumes.  The
          width I of the ensemble of plumes is controlled by the
          character of the flow field ensemble.  The width a of
          the plumes in the ensemble is controlled by the turbulent,
          eddy diffusivity K	   256

-------
                              FIGURES (continued)

Number                                                                    Page

12-2      Illustration of Processor P12 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	   270

15-1      Illustration of Processor P15 and its input and output
          interfaces with the processor network 	 	   278

BMC-1     Schematic illustration of the B-Matrix Compiler (BMC).
          The input interface is the Model  Input File (MIF).   The
          output of the BMC is the "b-matrix tape"  which is read
          by the model code CORE (see Figure 1-1)	   293

-------
                                    TABLES


Number                                                                    Page

1-1       Summary of input and output variables of each step of
          Processor PI 	     26

2-1       Pollutant species concentration (ppm) thaken to be
          representative of "clean" atmospheric conditions 	     31

2-2       Summary of input and output variables of each stage of
          Processor P2	     37

3-1       Summary of input and output parameters of each step of
          Processor P3 	     44

4-1       Summary of input and output parameters in each step of
          Processor P4 	     53

7-1       Summary of the input and output requirements of each stage
          of Processor P7 	     97

8-1       Summary of the input and output requirements of each stage
          of Processor P8 	    188

9-1       Summary of the input and output variables of each stage
          of Processor P9 and thei r sources 	    205

10-1      Summary of input and output parameters for Processor P10
          and thei r sources 	    215

11-1      Input requirements of stage UV11 and their sources 	    251

12-1      Summary of the expressions used to estimate the horizontal
          eddy diffusivity Kn in each of the model's three layers 	    259

12-2      Input and output variables of each stage of Processor P12 	    267

15-1      Deposition resistances (sec/m) for S02 as a function of
          land use type n and stability L 	    272

15-2      Deposition resistances (sec/m) for ozone as a function of
          1 and use type n and stabi 1 i ty L 	    273

15-3      Deposition resistances of several pollutants relative to that
          of ozone over agricultural land.  (Deduced from data of Hill
          and Chamberlain, 1971) 	    274
                                      XI

-------
                              TABLES (Continued)

Number                                                                    Page
15-1      Summary of the input and output parameters of each step
          of Processor P15 	    277
BMC-1     Definitions of parameters in the Model Input File (MIF) 	    294

-------
                               ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS
     I am indebted to Dr.  Don Relies of Computer Data Systems, Inc.  (CDSI) for
his invaluable assistance  in  developing the ideas on  the  flow field ensemble
presented in  Section 10,  and to Ms.  Achamma  Philip,  also  of CDSI,  for her
steadfast assistance in  developing the  numerical  boundary  condition  scheme
presented in  Section 6.   I  also want to acknowledge  the excellent work  of
Gayle Webster and Sherry McCoy of Systems Research and Development Corporation
(SRD), in preparing the manuscript.
                                     XI11

-------
                                   SECTION 1
                                 INTRODUCTION

GENERAL DISCUSSION
     In Part 1  of this report, (Lamb 1983d) we  developed a theoretical  basis
for a  regional-scale model  of photochemical air  pollutants.   Realizing that
the operational  model would be very complicated and would require considerable
time and effort to develop, we proposed that, rather than integrate all  of the
various  components  of the  model  into  a  single  unit,  we  construct   it  by
partitioning  the  mathematical  descriptions  of  small  groups  of  individual
physical and chemical  processes  into discrete modules interconnected by fixed
communication channels.  Such  modular  design would facilitate troubleshooting
operations,  provide  a  natural division  of labor  for  the tasks  required  to
implement  the model, and  permit  continual   incorporation  of state-of-the-art
techniques  without  the  need  to  overhaul   the  model  code  each  time   a  new
technique was introduced.

     The  overall   structure  of the  proposed model  system is  illustrated  in
Figure 1-1.  The box labeled CORE represents the computer language analogue of
the  differential   equations  that  describe  all   the  governing  processes
considered  in the  model  development in Part 1.  (These equations are listed at
the end of this  section.)   The  CORE module is expressed  in  a  very primitive
mathematical form  in the  sense that its  inputs are matrices and vectors whose

-------An error occurred while trying to OCR this image.

-------
elements are composites of meteorological  parameters,  chemical  rate constants,
etc.   For example,  the link between CORE and the output of the module labeled
CHEM, which contains the analogue of the chemical kinetics scheme, consists of
two vectors P and Cj, each of length N, where N is the  total number of chemical
species simulated.   The n-th  element of P  is  the net rate of  production of
species n  due  to  source  emissions  and  chemical  reactions  among  all  other
species, and the n-th element of Q is the net rate of  destruction of species n
due  to  its chemical  interaction  with all other  species.   Thus,  any chemical
kinetics  mechanism  can be  incorporated  into   the model  as  long  as  it  is
expressed  in  a form  that  is  compatible with the vector  interfaces  that  link
CORE with the chemistry module CHEM.

     The remainder  of the  inputs  required by CORE  are  prepared  by the  module
designated BMC  (b-matrix compiler)  in Figure 1-1.The  BMC performs essentially
the same task that language compilers perform in computers.  It translates the
parameter  fields  in  the  model input  file  (MIF) into  the matrix  and  vector
elements  that  are  required  to  operate  the  algorithms  in  CORE.   These
parameters  include   layer   thicknesses,   horizontal   winds  in  each  layer,
interfacial volume fluxes,  and deposition velocities.

     The variables  in  the  model  input file  (MIF)  are supplied  in  turn  by a
series  of  interconnected  processors,  labeled  P7, P8,  etc.   in  Figure  1-1,
several of  which are  rather  complex models  in  themselves.  These processors
generate the wind  fields,  the interfacial surfaces that  separate the layers,
turbulence  parameters,  source emissions,  and  many  other variables.   Their
inputs  consist  of  information  generated  by  other  processors  in  the network

-------
and partially  processed raw data  that are transferred through  the  processor
input file (PIF).

     The purpose of this  report is to provide detailed specifications  of the
processor network  illustrated  in  Figure  1-1.   This  network  will consist  of
both permanent  and interchangeable components.   The  permanent  components are
the CORE, the  BMC,  the MIF and PIF,  the  communication  channels that link the
processors and  the  PIF and MIF, and the interfaces between the processors and
the communication channels.  All  processors,  i.e.,  PI,  P2,  etc. and CHEM are
interchangeable components of  the  network.   Any or all  of the interchangeable
elements  can  be replaced  by other modules  as  long  as  the  replacements are
compatible with the communication  channel  interfaces.  By "interface" we mean
the  set of input  and output  variables  assigned  to  each processor.   We can
think of  each  processor as being analogous to an electronic device that plugs
into a  multireceptacle socket  (the interface).   Each receptacle that provides
an  input  to the processor is   connected  to  a  fixed  signal   source,  and each
receptacle that receives  an  output from the processor acts as a signal  source
on  the  network of  communication lines.  Considering the interchangeability of
the  processors and  chemistry  module  CHEM,  one  should  view  the  processor
designs that we develop in this report as "first generation" versions that may
be  replaced in the course of future tests and refinements of the model.

     Neither the chemistry module nor the results of any test simulations are
discussed  in  this   report.   These  topics  will  be  discussed  in  later parts of
this series of reports.   In the following sections we present designs of each
processor in the  network including the BMC.  Theoretical  descriptions  of the

-------
mathematics contained within  the  module 'CORE were given  in  Section 9 of Part
1.   We  will  not  elaborate  further on  this  part of the  model  system in this
report  other  than to  describe in  more detail  the  numerical  scheme  that  we
apply to  the  transport  and  diffusion portion of the  model  equations.   These
details are  given in  Appendix A of  Section 6  which  describes  Processor P7.

     Figure 1-2  shows  the region in  the Northeastern United  States  to which
the regional model will  be  applied.  Each point in  the  figure represents the
center of  a grid cell  in which values of all pollutant species concentrations
are computed by the model.
SUMMARY OF PROCESSOR FUNCTIONS
     The  functions  performed   by  each  processor  in  the  model  network,
illustrated earlier in Figure 1-1 are summarized below.
Processor PI
     Prepares  upper air  data  for  use  by other  processors in  the network.
Processor P2
     Uses surface air  monitoring data to estimate  initial,  lateral  and upper
boundary conditions on pollutant species concentrations.

-------
000'69 A
                       01
                       CO
                       
-------
Processor P3
     Prepares surface meteorological  data for use in other processors.
Processor P4
     Estimates  surface  roughness,  Obukhov  length,  surface  heat flux,  and
friction velocity.
Processor P7
     Simulates the depth  and  motion  of the nighttime  surface  inversion  layer
and  the  depth  of  the  daytime  shear  layer  and  provides  smoothed  terrain
elevations.
Processor P8
     Computes depths of  the  convective mixed layer and cloud layer, cloud and
turbulent entrainment  velocities  at the mixed layer  top,  synoptic-scale mean
vertical  motion on  the  top  surfaces  of model  Layers 2  and  3,  and  layer
averaged horizontal  wind divergences.
Processor P9
     Calculates  factors  for  correcting  the  chemical  rate  constants  for
temperature, density, and sunlight variations.

-------
Processor P10
     Transforms the source emissions inventory into source strength functions,
and  estimates  the  plume volume  fraction parameter  required  in  the  subgrid
scale chemistry parameterization.
Processor Pll
     Computes  ensembles  of  volume  averaged horizontal  winds  for each  model
layer (except  the  nighttime  surface inversion layer which  is  treated in P7).
Processor P12
     Calculates  layer  interface  turbulent volume  fluxes;  horizontal  eddy
diffusivities; and cumulus cloud flux partition parameter.
Processor 15
     Computes pollutant species deposition velocities.
BMC
     Compiles  processor  network  outputs  for  input  into  the  model  core
algorithms.

-------
SUMMARY OF MODEL. EQUATIONS

     The equations upon which the  regional-scale  mode is based were derived in
Part 1  of  this study.  The  basic  forms of the governing equations in each of
the model's four layers are  summarized  below.

Layer 1
where
                  \    a\
                             + u  ai
                         Fo,i
               a cos(|)
          a  = earth radius  at MSL  (in  meters)

          \  = longitude

          0  = latitude
          A  = a2  (A(j)AX)  cost))
          A({),AA. = latitude,  longitude  grid cell  dimensions
                = constants  (A<|) =       AA = ^°)

-------
                       A+AA/2    <)>+A<|>/2

             2
            acos<|)                  MAX {0,

                       A.-AA/2    <|>-A/2


                       - MAX [zT(A',f ), zo
VU L -, /
        >       subgrid scale fluxes of c (see Part 1, Section 7)
1J


-, = all chemical, rainout and washout processes.


<$>-, = all emissions of c in Layer 1 (includes stacks and surface
       sources above nighttime radiation inversion.


-,, , = layer averaged horizontal wind components
             (u = east-west component, positive eastward),
             (v = north-south component, positive northward).



Fl,l = (1-aTl> K1 - 2)Wlm + 1 V


P  = deposition velocity of species c


Oy-,(\,<|>,t) = fraction of surface H^ penetrated by terrain
              n           w  - w
             T
                  C -
     -  ^ wm " ZT, neutral and  unstable  conditions;
wR1  -  |  ui     l

            Hi> ( = given  inversion  layer depth  growth rate),  stable
                            10

-------
wn, = mean vertical velocity on H-,  (terrain  induced  component

 Ui   excluded)                  x


a   = rms vertical turbulence on H,  ( = 0  in stable  cases)
 "1                               •*•



w   = threshold of cumulus "root" updraft  velocity on  H,
»l>, o~ , w   (see Layer 2 equations)
    c   c
          9  I     -f-2
erf(x) = —      e L  dt
 Fo,l = (orTo
 T   = fraction of surface H   in  given  grid  cell  penetrated by
       terrain
       Ozone:


          F0(03) = <03>1 w.A.






               - (1 - a)   •
Nitric Oxide:


   FQ(NO) = 1 w_X_ - NO w
               -  (1 - a)
                                             ,  otherwise
                                                  -  a)
                                                   ,  otherwise

-------
       Nitrogen Dioxide:

          FQ(N02)  = lW_\_ - N02
                                                               - a)
                         - (1 - a)
                                                           2  ,  otherwise
                 all other species, x-
               F0(X) = i*_\_ - XW+A+(1  -  |)(1  -  a)  -  (1 - a)(v£x + S )(1 + p
                                                                        A.       A
                    a =
                                         1  - a
                                     -  -  fe/A6
     See Layer 0 equations for specification  of  03,  NO,  N02>  x,  w+, A+, etc.
Layer 2
af
                     
                    =   + 
V2(\,<)),t) = a2cos<(>
                                X-AA/2
                                               {z2(X',<))l,t) - MAX [zT(Xl,
-------
     2

                 subgrid  scale  fluxes  of  c  (see  Part 1,  Section 7)

     2
     2  = all chemical, rainout  and washout  processes  in Layer 2





     2  = source emissions  in  Layer 2  (if  any)




     2, 2 = Layer 2 averaged  winds.
F2 2 =  c,      c  (c  -   ) +         -   9  [.

 t. 31.     ACT       C      (L       c.  O\»   tit/
 l,2 = aTlP2 + (1 " CTT1)C1W1 +  (1  "  2)Wlm + (2 "




W-, ,w, , see Layer 1; WQ, ,  see  Part 1,  Eq. 4-44c)





a  = fractional area coverage  of  cumulus  clouds





w  = mean upward velocity  in cumulus  clouds




fe

7^ = turbulent entrainment rate of inversion  air  into mixed layer
   = mean vertical velocity  (mean  of  both  terrain induced component w-™

     and divergent component w™)
-2





  = fraction of cloud  air  from  surface layer






     0 < 1)1 < 1 and
                """~~
                          ..       Tn
                      —  T  T       | Q    C
                                 13

-------
                    - w
          Vc = -
          c, c', I, w+, \+ = See  Layer 0  equations






Layer 3


                                                        a3  .A rr:      r   i _

                                5*\7T Lro o   ("o oJ - v-^3
                         X+AX/2  ()>+A3 = all chemical  (wet  and  dry) rainout and washout processes





     3, 3 = layer averaged winds
                 W  ~ W

      F    _ _  r !2	*£ 4

      « - - o  L ^ _ _..   -  iu/tiujv-_    ^'—'s^ '  ^'3 aF"
      
-------
               3 ^ , if dH3/dt < 0 ;

            I
      3,3



                   - 3) dHT/dt + , ^  , otherwise
                             «3         O O t





          c» = concentration of species c above z3





          dH3/dt = given volume flux through model top surface
           c = (1 - <|02 + i|/[|c'  + (1 - 4)c]



               where c1  and c are defined with the Layer 0 variables.
Layer 0



     <03>0 = (1 - C)
     0     =     w_\_<03>1


      3    "
                          »  otherwise
     0 = (1 -  O  NO +
      N°   =
                  w.\.1


                   "
             w+\+ +(1 -
                                     15

-------
NO1
        I     , ,Mn
                             ,  otherwise
0 =
N02
         •N0£v -H 03v * 3
          N02v + (NQ +  NQ
            z      NU    NU2     ,  otherwise
Species x other than 03, NO, and N02:



         o =
   X   =
         V^Ti^T^


         vv + ?
   X   """  ft  4- \)
Parameters:
     X. = %[1 - erf
                                 16

-------
\  =
             (j            •«
              W           Z^

           - — exp ( -
                           w
          +    [l - erf (
      v = u* (plume entrapment velocity)
        = plume volume fraction
    a   = rms vertical turbulent velocity  on  H
                           17

-------
                                   SECTION 2
                                 PROCESSOR PI

GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This Processor performs a  number  of standard operations  on the raw rawin
data to put them into the forms  required by the higher level processors in the
network.   It  operates  on the  rawin  data  only.    We  assume that  the  "raw"
rawin record at the m-th station consists of a sequence of I   "vectors"
          [SPD.DIR.T.TD.p]^, i=lf...IB                                  (1-1)
where the i-th  vector  represents  the wind speed (m/sec),  direction (degrees),
temperature  (°C),  and   dew  point  depression  (°C)  at  pressure  level   p
(millibars) at a given station m.   The number of observation levels Im in each
record  can  vary from  station  to station  and from  hour  to hour.   The steps
necessary to convert the raw data into the desired forms follow.
Step I
     Convert  the speed  and  direction  (SPO.DIR)^   into  cartesian  components
(u,v) at each level i and at each station m by
                                     18

-------
where
          eim = (DIRim)'(2*/360).                                        (1-3)
These values  must  be processed further (in  step  10)  before recording in the
PIF.
Step 2
     Convert the temperature and dew  point  depression TD into the water vapor
mixing  ratio  q (mass of  water per total  mass of  air)  at each  level  i  and
station m by
                0.622e.
          *• = TV£
where
          R    =  0.461 joule g"  °K~
          L    =  2500 joule g   (latent heat of  vaporization)
          e    =  40 mb (saturation vapor pressure  at T  )
          TQ   =  29 + 273 = 302°K (reference temperature)
          T...  =  T.  - TD.  + 273 (dew point temperature at  level  i, station m)
           uim     im     im
          p.   =  pressure (mb) at level i,  station m.


     The  mixing  ratio q.   and dew point T,,.  are outputs of this stage and
require further processing in Step 6.
                                     19

-------
Step 3
     Compute  the  relative humidity  RH.   for each  level  1  and  station  m  by
where  e    is  found  from (1-5)  by replacing  the  dew  point  Tn.   with  the
                                                                 n.
                                                                 U I Ul
temperature T. .
Step 4


     Convert  the pressure  p.   at  the  levels  1=1,2,...I   of the  upper air


observation  at  station  m  to  altitudes  z.  (AGL)  by  first converting the


temperature measurements T.  to virtual temperatures
                          1 HI
          Tvim • 
-------
Step 5
     Let z  be  the  known elevation (MSL in meters) of the m-th rawin station,
and let pQm and TVQ(n be the  station  pressure and virtual temperature.  Using
(1-7) we now calculate the sea-level pressure at station m:
          p,-^ = sea-level pressure at station m (in millibars)
                         zm 9
               = Pomexp[JU - ];                                       (1-8)
                  om     Kd  'vom
and we calculate the geopotential height Qm  (m2/sec2) of the 1000 mb surface:
*om '


                    + Vvo.1" ITOF •
Using the    value from the previous observation time, say, t-At, compute

Record om and 4>om in the PIF.
Step 6
     At this  stage  the virtual temperature,  relative  humidity,  dew point and
mixing  ratio  are known  at each  elevation  z. in the  sounding (from step 3).
These data should now be interpolated to give semi-continuous  soundings, e.g.,
T (z) and  q (z)  of  virtual temperature and mixing ratio at each rawin station
m.  That is, we convert
                                     21

-------
where
          z = z  + nAz  ,  n=0,...
Az=50 meters, and
                       5000-z.
                   m     bO                                            VJ
The third-order interpolation scheme described in Processor P8 (see Eqs.  8-56,
8-60,  ...69,   and  8-70)  should  be  used  in  performing the  transformations
indicated by  Eqs.  (1-10).   Record the Tfflf  qm> TDm, and RHm values for each of
the z given by (l-10d) in the PIF.
Step 7
     The pressure-height pairs  (p^,  z,-m) should be transformed  into  a semi-
continuous sounding as in Step 6 above.   In this task the sequence begins with
the sea-level  pressure,  followed  by the station pressure, and the observation
levels aloft, i.e.,

          (P-lm'0)'(Pon,'y'(Plm'zlm)---(Plmm'zImm) => Pm(z)>          (1'lla)
where
          z=nAz, n=0,l,...100;                                         (1-llb)

and Az=50  meters.   In performing  the  interpolation (1-lla),  an exponential
formula should be employed based on the hydrostatic condition
                                                                        (1-12)
                                     22

-------
Record the p  values at each z given by (1-llb) in the PIF.
Step 8
     Using the  Pm(z) profile  obtained in Step  7,  determine the geopotential
      _2
(m2sec  ) of the  850,  700, and 500 millibar  surfaces at each station m.  For
example,

          *(850)m = 9Z850
where g is gravity and zQ50 is the elevation (MSL) that satisfies

                    = 85° mb"
By the same process compute 
-------
                                          -2   _1                          _3
where pm  is  in  millibars and [^=287 m2sec   °K~ ,  Tvm is in °K, and p=kg m~ .
From 9 and p compute the profile a  (z) of static stability from
                                  din
                 _ -[em(z+Az)-em(z-Az)]-io~2
          CTsm(z) ~
                                   -3                           ..2
With p  in  millibars  and p in  kg  m  ,  a  has units of m4 sec2 kg  .   Record the
profiles 0m(z),pm(z) and (Jsm(z) in the PIF for each rawin station m.
Step 10
     Interpolate the wind  components  u-  and v.  of Eq. (1-2) above to obtain
the profile
where z takes the values given by (lOd).
Stage INT

     The raw rawin data are generally available only at 12-hour intervals,
but the output variables produced by this processor, PI, are required each
hour by processors further along in the network.  Therefore, an interpolation
of all output variables must be performed to provide values at hourly intervals.
The specific interpolation formula that is used for this purpose is  left to the
discretion of the user.
                                     24

-------
     Table 1-1 summarizes the inputs and outputs  of each  step  of  Processor  PI
and Figure 1-3 illustrates the processor and its  data interfaces.
                                     25

-------
                 Table 1-1  Summary of input and output variables
                            of each step of Processor PI.
Input
Variable
SP01m
DIRfm
Description Source Step
wind speed (ms~ ) at RAW 1
level i at rawin
station m.
Wind direction RAW
(compass degrees) at
level i at rawin
station m
Output
Variable
uim
-------
Table 1-1  Summary of input and output variable
           of each step of Processor PI.   (Continued)
Input
Variable
zm
in

p
om

vnm
V Ulll
vim
V 1 III
q.

RHim
i in
zim
TDim
*"i m
1 ill
zim
1 III


pm«

Pm(z)
in
T (z)
vm







Description
elevation (meters,
msl) of rawin
station m
station pressure
(mb) at station m.

virtual temperature
(°C) at station m.
see above

see above

see above

see above
see above
see above

see above



pressure at elevation
z(MSL) over station m.

see above

see above








Source Step
RAW 5


RAW


Step 4

Step 4 6

Step 2

Step 3

Step 4
Step 2
RAW 7

Step 4



Step 7 8

Step 7 9

Step 6







Output
Variable Description
'OV geopotential (m2sr2)
om K of 1000 mb surface
at station m, hour t^.
*««,(*!,) time rate °f change
om k (m2s-3) of geo-
potential of 1000 mb
surface at station m.

T (z,t. ) Temperature, mixing
ratio, relative humidity,
q (z,tk) and dew point profiles
at station m resolved
RH_(z,t. ) to Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs.
TDm(z,tk) (l-10d,e) at hour tk.

pm(z,t.) pressure (mb) at
elevation z(msl) above
station m, resolved to
Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs. (l-10d,e) at
hour t^.
•fr/ocmm geopotential (m2sec~2 )
*/7ftnX of the 850, 700, and
*r(nitt 500mb surfaces at
^ouujm _4.,4.i~_ _.
station m.
9 (z) potential temperature
m (°K) at elevation z
over station m, resolved
to Az=50m as prescribed
by Eqs. (l-10d,e).
p (z,t. ) air density (kgm~ ) at
elevation z (resolved
as above) over station m,
hour t, .
acm(z,t,,) static stability
Sm K /n,4c2Un-2>\ a-f olowatirtn
                         27
z at station m,
                                                                 hour t. .

-------
               Table 1-1. Summary of input and output variables
                          of each step of Processor PI.  (Concluded).
Input                                                  Output
Variable       Description      Source      Step       Variable       Description


u.        see above              Step 1      10        "(x^.z.t. )•  east-west and north-
 lra                                                      ~"    k   south wind
v.        see above       '       Step 1                ^Xm'2'^  at elevat"'on z (as
                                                       [also       given by Eqs. l-10d,e
                                                       "m>vm]      at location x  of
                                                        m  m       station m, atmhour
                                         28

-------
T
       YYYYYYYYYYYYYYY
-L
               29

-------
                                   SECTION 3
                                 PROCESSOR P2
GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor determines  initial,  upper and lateral boundary conditions
on all of  the  pollutant species simulated by  the  regional  model.   Presently,
it is impossible to estimate these  conditions with  an.accuracy anywhere
near  that  of   available  emissions  estimates,  because:    (1)  the  pollutant
monitoring data from which the initial and boundary conditions must be derived
are  few  and  nonuniformly  distributed,   (2)  no  measurements are  routinely
available aloft, and  (3) most of the intermediate pollutant species that must
be treated  to   simulate  the chemistry properly  are not  measured  at  all.   In
addition, the  model requires  conditions on the cell  averaged concentrations
but only point measurements are made at the monitoring sites.

     The  problems  caused  by  the  paucity  of  data  can  be  mitigated  by
initializing the  model  on a "clean" day,  such  as  a day  immediately following
the  passage of a  cold front,  and  by choosing  a  model  domain that  is large
enough that  the quantities  of pollutants  emitted  by  sources  just outside the
model boundaries  are  small  compared to  those  generated within the simulation
area itself.   In such a case, we can use "clean atmosphere" conditions for the
initial, upper and lateral  boundary values  of  each species.   Table 2-1 lists
these  values for  each  of  the  23  pollutants modeled  by  the Demerjian-Schere
(1979) kinetics scheme that we have been using during the development phase of
the  regional model.
                                    30

-------
        Table 2-1.   Pollutant species concentrations (ppm) taken to be
                    representative of "clean"  atmospheric conditions*.
                    (Notation:   1.000-01 = 10" .)
NO
HC2
HN02
H202
H02
R20
4.
3.
3.
8.
2.
2.
499-04
390-03
473-05
784-05
078-05
452-09
N02
HC3
HN03
0
H04N
R102
1.
7.
7.
1.
7.
1.
404-03
679-03
215-04
284-10
583-06
550-05
CO
HC4
PAN
N03
RO
R202
1.
6.
3.
5.
5.
5.
010-01
911-04
808-04
434-07
848-08
319-06
HC1
03
RN03
HO
R02

1.
3.
1.
3.
5.

084-03
522-02
004-06
734-07
578-05

*Values  reported  here  were  obtained  by  initializing the  Demerjian-Schere
 (1979) 23-species  kinetics mechanism with  the following  species  concentra-
 tions and allowing reactions for 90 minutes in full sun conditions:
     NO = .OOlppm,  N02 =  .002ppm, total  non-methane hydrocarbon =  .05ppm,
     CO = .Ippm, 03 = .02ppm, all other species = Oppm.
 Hydrocarbon classes are as follows:

     HC1 = olefin,  HC2  = paraffin, HC3 = aldehydes, HC4 = aromatics.   Initial
     values  of each  of these  lumped species  were  obtained from the  total
     nonmethane hydrocarbon concentration using the speciation method
     suggested by Demerjian (1983).
                                    31

-------
     The   problems   caused   by  the   unavailability   of   volume-averaged
concentration  data   cannot  be  eliminated   because  there   is   no  unique
relationship  between   the   concentration  values measured  at  one  or  several
discrete points within  a  given volume of space and the concentration averaged
over  that  volume.   This  is  the   so-called  subgrid-scale  closure  problem
encountered in all modeling studies  in which it is  impossible to choose a grid
size small enough  to  resolve  the smallest spatial  variations in the simulated
variables.   In Part 1,  Section 5, we developed a  crude  subgrid-scale closure
scheme  for  use in treating the pollution chemistry.  Proceeding  along lines
similar  to  those  described there we could formulate  an  approximate  way  of
extracting  volume-averaged concentration  estimates from point measurements.
However, we  will   not  attempt this   here  because  the  improvement  in accuracy
gained  in the  initial  concentration  fields would probably  not be  significant
enough  to warrant  the  development and implementation efforts.   Perhaps future
modeling studies  can  investigate this problem in detail  if the need is great.

     In  the  remainder of  this section we  outline a  procedure for obtaining
rough estimates of initial and boundary conditions  on pollutant concentrations
in  situations  where  the   "clean atmosphere"   assumption  does   not  apply.   An
important point to note in the preparation of initial and boundary conditions
is that, due to inaccuracies and uncertainties in the methods used, the set of
concentrations  obtained  for   any given  grid  cell  or  boundary  point  will
generally  not  be  consistent  with  chemical  equilibrium  conditions.   For
example, if  one deduces concentration values  for  03,  NO,  N02  and olefin from
the  monitoring data  and  assigns "nominal" or zero  values  to all  the other
species  included  in  the  chemical  kinetics  scheme,  one would  find  upon
initializing  the   model  with  these   values  that   a period  of rapid chemical
                                    32

-------
transformations  immediately  ensues.   These rapid  changes indicate  that  the
concentration conditions  selected for  the  initial  state  do  not  represent  a
state  near  equilibrium.   These  spurious  reactions  are  an  artifact of  the
chosen  set   of   concentrations  and  are  not  representative  of the  chemical
activity that occurs  just after the initial moment.  This is  analogous to the
initialization problem  in meteorological  models where failure to prescribe an
initial  state  that  is in geostrophic balance  results  in the  generation of
spurious gravity waves.

     The transient  concentration  variations excited  by errors  in  the initial
state  diminish   the  accuracy of  the  model's  predictions within  some finite
period  following  the  initial  instant  tQ.   They  also  exact  a  significant
penalty  in   computer  time.   Because  when  the  chemical  state  is  far  from
equilibrium, the mathematical algorithm in the model  that handles the chemical
rate equation must  utilize many small time steps to  track the approach of the
state  of  the system  to equilibrium.   Since this operation must be performed
initially at every  grid point in the  model  and at  all boundary points at all
times  where  the boundary condition specification  is inexact,  a considerable
portion of  the computation  time  required  by  the model can be  wasted on this
fictitious  phenomenon.   The remedy   is  to  use the  initial  concentrations
deduced  from the  monitoring data  as  the  initial  state  in  a  batch reactor
model;  to  run that  model for  a  time  long  enough  for the chemical  state to
settle  down  to  a  point where  changes are occurring relatively slowly (say,
time scales ~10 min); and then to use the concentrations of each species given
by  the batch reactor  model  at that  point as  the  initial conditions in the
regional model.   The  same procedure   should be used  to  obtain  the upper and
lateral boundary conditions.
                                    33

-------
Stage LBC:   Estimating lateral boundary conditions from monitoring data
(1)  Collect  hourly  surface  monitoring data  for  each  species  x-(ppro)  i  =
     1....IMAX  from  all  stations within  20  km  either side  of each  of the
     regional model's four lateral boundaries.   Each station within this 40 km
     wide boundary zone  is  treated as though it lies on the model boundary at
     the point closest to the station location.
(2)  Use a cubic  spline  or  other acceptable interpolation formula to estimate
     concentrations x^  U-g,  <]>g,  t)(ppm) at  each grid point  (Ag,  <|>g)  on the
     boundary.  Here (\,<|>) denotes the longitude and latitude of a cell center
     on the boundary of the regional  model  domain.
(3)  Using  the  functions x -j obtained  in  step  2,  estimate  layer  averaged
     concentrations along the boundaries as follows:

            = B  x,- (AR, V t),    n=l,2,3               (2-1)
            1  B   b     n    n  i   B   B         i=l,...IMAX

     where the B  are empirical constants to be estimated from the NEROS field
                n
     experiment data.
(4)  For each  hour  t  ,  each boundary point (An, B), and each layer n perform
     the batch reactor equilibration process, described in the introduction to
     this section, to  the set of concentrations g. t)>n, i=l,...IMAX
     given  by (2-1).   Record the results  in  the  ICBC  portion  of  the model
     input file MIF (units = ppm for each species).
STAGE 1C:  Estimating initial conditions from monitor-ing data
(1)  Collect surface monitoring data for all pollutant species at all  stations
     within  the  regional model  domain  at the initial hour  t   (=1200 EST)  of
                                    34

-------
     the period to  be simulated.  Noon  is  chosen as the  initialization  hour
     because,   at  this  time,   pollutants   are  usually  distributed  nearly
     uniformly in  the mixed layer and initial  values for Layers  I and 2 can be
     equated with  minimum error.
(2)  In places where more than one monitoring station lies  within a grid cell,
     compute a weighted average of the reported values taking into account the
     proximity of each station  to  sources  and  the distribution  of  land use
     types  within  that cell.   For  example,  if  one monitoring  site  is  in  a
     rural area and  70%  of that cell is  in  rural  land use,  the rural station
     would  be  given  a   weight  of  0.7  in   computing  the   cell   average
     concentration.
(3)  Fit  a two-dimensional   function  to  the  finite  set of  cell  averaged
     concentrations  obtained in step 2 and from this function derive values of
     the concentration of each measured pollutant species at  all grid cells in
     the model region.
(4)  Subject each set  of  concentrations  i=l,...IMAX obtained in step 3 to the
     batch reactor equilibration  process.   Call  the results  of  this operation
     X,-(X>  >  t )  where  (X,  ) ranges  over  all   grid points in  the model
     region.  Now  record the following initial  layer averaged  concentrations
     (ppm) in the ICBC portion of MIF:

     , t0)>! = X^X, , to)                                      (2-2)
     2 = Xjtt, , t0)                              .        (2-3)
     %(A, *, t0)>3 = ^Xjfr, 4>, t0)                                    (2-4)
     where  |.  is an empirical constant  to  be  derived from the  NEROS field
     experiment data.
                                    35

-------
Stage UBC:  Upper boundary conditions
(1)  In the first  generation  model  we will use the "clean" atmosphere species
     concentrations listed in  Table  2-1 for the upper  boundary  conditions XQ,,
     for  all   cells  and  all  hours.    Record  these  in the  ICBC  portion of
     MIF(units = ppm for all  species), i.e.

          X* ,(X, «», t) = XCLEAN  ,                1XL....IMAX;           (2-5)
            jl             LLtAN' 1                all (\, 4, t)

Table  2-2 summarizes the inputs  and outputs of Processor  P2,  and Figure 2-1
illustrates  the  processor  and  its  interfaces  with  the  processor network.
                                    36

-------
               Table 2-2  Summary of input and output  variables  of  each
                          stage of Processor P2.
Input
Variable
             Description
                    Source   Stage
   Output
   Variable
                                                           Description
X..|,(t )
 1K  m
          concentration (ppm)
          of i-th pollutant
          at hour t  measured
          at surface monitoring
          station k=l,...K.
                       RAW
                               LBC
n
average concen-
tration (ppm) of
i-th pollutant
in layer n=l,2,3
at boundary cell
(\D, d»D) at hour
tf
 ,-i,
 IK
   (t _)
     Ml
see Stage LBC input.    RAW
                                         ic
                    average concentration
                    (ppm) of i-th pollut-
                    ant in layer n=l,2,3
                    in grid cell (A,$) at
                    the initial  instant
                    t_.
X.j(tm)
see Stage LBC input.    RAW
                                         UBC
                                                 tn)
                    concentration (ppm)
                    of i-th pollutant
                    at top surface of
                    model over grid
                    cell (\,<)>) at hour
                    V
                                        37

-------
  H
  D
CN a.
Q. h-
             YYY
c

A


+*

CD
^

CO
C

A

o
+*
 *
•e-




 8*
                                    3
                                    a
                                    *^

                                    o
                                    TJ
                                    C
                                    CO
                                    **
                                    3 .
                                    a..*



                                    IS
                                    •— tt
                                    s °
                                    C/) b.
                                     ®
                                    8^
                                    a- j=
                                    § «
                                    3 «-•
                                    CN

                                    £
                                    3
                                    a>
                                    u.
                 38

-------
                                   SECTION 4
                                 PROCESSOR P3
GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor performs standard operations on the surface meteorological
data to  put them  into  forms required  by the higher  level  processors  in the
network.   The  surface and  rawin  data are  treated in  separate  processors to
facilitate  future  alterations  in  the  data  analyses and  to permit  easier
incorporation of additional data.
     We assume that at given time intervals (not necessarily hourly intervals)
the surface observations consist of the set
          [SPD,DIR,TJD,p]n
where  n  denotes  the  surface  station,  whose  location  is  x •  and  the  other
                                                            *>Tl
variables   represent  wind   speed   (ms   ),   direction   (compass   degrees),
temperature  (°C),  dew point  depression  (°C)  and  station (not  sea-level)
pressure (mb).
Step 1
     Convert  the  wind  speed  and  direction into  north-south and  east-west
components as follows:

          Qn = Qfen> = " SPVsin 8n                                    (
          vn = v(xn) = - SPDn-cos 6n                                    (

                                    39

-------
where
             = DIRn-(2n/360).
The components (u  ,v )  are  outputs  of this processor for  each  time interval
Step 2
     Convert the  temperature and dew  point depression  to  mixing  ratio,  dew
point  temperature,   relative humidity  and  virtual   temperature as  follows:
               0.622e
          qn =     e    (=mixing ratio)                                 (3-2a)
                 n  n
where
                     L  1   1

          R   =  0.461 joule g"1 °K~1
          L   =  2500 joule g"
          e   =  40mb (saturation vapor pressure at temperature T )
          TQ  =  302 °K
          p   =  station pressure (mb)
and
          TDn = Tn " TDn + 273   (=dew point temperature)               (3-2b)
                   p ~e
          RHn = qn On622e    (-relative humidity)                       (3-2c)

where e    is  obtained from (3-2a') by replacing the dew point temperature Tg
in the formula with the dry bulb temperature T  (expressed in °K);

          Tvn " Tn ^ + 0l61
-------
where T  (and hence T  ) is in °K.
The   mixing  ratio   q    (dimensionless)  and   the  relative   humidity  RH
(dimensionless) can be  recorded in PIF (they are  outputs  of this processor).
Before recording  the  dew point and virtual temperature in PIF, they should be
converted to degrees Celsius as follows:
          TDn
where TDn (°K) is from Eq. 3-2b and Tyn (°K) is from (3-2d).
Step 3
     Let zn  be  the elevation (meters, MSL) of surface station n.  Compute the
geopotential of the 1000 mb surface

          *ons«VRdTvnlnl5ro                                      (3'3)
where  Tyn  is from  (3-2d)  above (in  °K)  and Rrf = 287 m2s"   °K~ .   Using the
value of    from the previous time interval, estimate the time rate of change
of *   by
               *on = t*on(t) " ^n^^0^                              (3'4)
     Compute the  sea-level  pressure p ,  at each station site x ,n=l,2,...N as
follows.
                          gz
          Rsl n = Pnexp [^p-S- ]                                         (3-5)
           sl,n    n     RT
                                    41

-------
where pn  is the station pressure  (mb)  and all  other variables have  the  same
definitions  as  above.    If  the  surface  temperature  T    undergoes  large
variations between day  and  night,  a 12-hour moving averaged  temperature  must
be  used  in  (3-5)  to avoid fictitious variations  in  the estimated  sealevel
pressure.
Step 4
     Compute the surface potential  temperature and air density at each station
          en = Tn  (1M)°-286   (=potential  temperature)                (3-6)
                     "n

          Pn = Tpp- -ICf2       (=density, kg m"3)                      (3"7)
                d vn
where Typ  is  from  Eq.  3-2d and is  in  degrees Kelvin (°K), pn  is  the station
pressure in millibars and

          Rd = 287 m2sec"  °K~1.
Record en(°K) and pn (kg m" ) in PIF.
Stage INT
     Values of  each  of the parameters produced by this processor are required
at hourly  intervals  by higher level processors in the network.   However, most
of  the  inputs  to  this  processor,  P3,  may  only  be  available  at  3-hour
intervals.  Thus,  it is necessary to interpolate each of the parameter values
produced  in this   processor by some  means   adequate  to   produce  reasonable
                                    42

-------
estimates of  parameter  values each  hour.   Stage  INT  is intended  to  perform
this task.   We leave the detailed specification of the  interpolation algorithm
to the discretion of the user.

     The inputs  and outputs of  each step  of Processor P3 are  summarized  in
Table 3-1 and illustrated schematically in Figure 3-1.
                                    43

-------
                   Table 3-1  Summary of input  and  output parameters
                              of each step  of Processor  P3.
Input
Variable
               Description
                                 Source
Step
Output
Variable
Description
SPD.
DIR.
          surface wind speed       RAW
          (m/s) at station n
          surface wind direction   RAW
          (compass degrees) at
          station n.
                     east-west surface wind
                     component at station n,
                     hour t .
                           m
                     north-south surface wim
                     component at station n,
                     hour t .
TD
          surface temperature      RAW
          (°C) at station n
          surface dew point        RAW
          depression (°C)
          at station n.

          station pressure         RAW
          (mb) at station n.
                     surface mixing ratio
                     (dimensionless) at
                     station n, hour t .

                     surface relative humidf
                     (dimensionless) at
                     station n, hour t .
                                      m
                     surface dew point (°C)
                     at station n,  hour t .

                     surface virtual
                     temperature (°C) at
                     station n, hour t .
 vn
          elevation (meters MSL)   RAW
          of surface station n.

          virtual temperature      Step 2
                                                                 geopotential  (m2s~2)  of
                                                                 1000mb  surface  at locat'
                                                                 x   of station n,  hour t
                                                                 ~n                      n
          station pressure
          (mb)
                                   RAW
                                                        on
                     time rate of change
                     (m2s~3) of geopotential
                     of 1000mb surface at
                     station n location,
                                                                   ,
                                                                  n
                                                                     at hour t
                                                                               .
                                                                              m
                                                       p ,   (t )  sea-level  pressure
                                                        Sl'n  m  (mb)  at station n,
                                                                 hour t
                                                                        .
 vn
          see above

          see above
                                   RAW

                                   Step 2
                                        44
           0 (t )
            n  m
                                                       p (t )
                                                        n  m
            surface potential
            temperature (°K) at
            station n, hour t
                                                                                  m
                                                                 surface air density
                                                                 (kg m'3) at station n,
                                                                 hour t
                                                                       ffl.

-------
   YYYYYYYYYYY
H
3
CO O.
Q.H
D





^
4
^
<:





••»
*
•^
c
3





^
4-
^
<2





^
•»
*
^>
C
»





JM
<>
««i
c





^
r
^
c
r



\

•mv
1
I
GC





^
••
•



\

*|
^
£
h





«
^
c
D
•





«•
^
H



/

t 4>
^ •••
C
>
• •€

(



*
••»
c
0
>

y
(
\
(

*
•^
~€


1
>

^
•*
c
o
^

^
•
f
M>
•

I
*••••*
4-» —
"c i
3? c
j
V

CO >
Q.
LU

«•.
1^
»•
C
1

>

^

*•
*
^
G

"K
•



•*,
7
^
c
)

*m
7
•M

(



^
l_
;
CO
c
G
Q.
CO
C
oc
c
H-
C
Q
h-
         c
         a
c
_
                         o
                         V)
                         o
                         - o
                         •B I

                         5 ®
                         .2 c
                         (0 o
                         i3 (A

                         II
                         m
                         •£- 4-1
                         o -3
                         (/) ^
                         CO
                         03

                         3
                         a>
                         iZ
   V V V V v V
             45

-------
                                   SECTION 5
                                 PROCESSOR P4

GENERAL DISCUSSION
     This processor estimates  the  surface roughness z ,  the Obukhov length L,
the  surface  heat flux  Q,  and the  friction velocity  u*  in each  cell  of the
NEROS  grid.   The  last three  parameters  are treated  in  a  single processor,
rather than distributed among several, because they are interrelated variables
and  the  value  estimated for one can be altered by a change in the method used
to  estimate  another.   The  method  we  use  in this  first  generation processor
network  to estimate Q is based on the scheme proposed by Golder (1972).  More
refined  methods  have  recently been  reported, e.g.,  Holtslag and  van Ulden
(1983),  and  these  should  be considered  in  the development  of  the  second
generation model.
     We  should also point  out that the estimates  of the  friction velocity u*
that we outline here are derived from the raw surface wind observations, i.e.,
(u,v),  rather  than  from the  flow  fields  that are finally  used  in the model,
i.e., the output (ls  j) of Pll.  To utilize data from the latter source
would  result  in complex  interconnections  of  Pll  with other  processors  that
require  L, Q  and u* values.  The difficulty of operating such a system cannot
be  justified  considering  that the  method of estimating  u*  is  itself quite
crude,  and that  the flow fields that Pll generates are constrained locally in
space-time by the observed winds.   That is, the observed surface winds that we
will  use here  to estimate u* are explicitly incorporated into the flow fields
generated by Pll.
                                    46

-------
     Each of  the steps  below  must be  performed for  each  cell in  the NEROS
grid.
Step I
     Determine  the  wind  speed and  exposure  classes  C   and C   for  use  in
                                                        W       c
estimating  the  Obukhov  length L.   First,  using  the locations  XR of  the  N
surface meteorological stations (n=l,2,...N) and the observed winds (u ,v ) at
each  station  and at  each hour tm,  estimate the wind speed  u   in the given
grid  cell  at hour  t  by  performing a weighted  average of  the  observations
                                          _2
(un,vn)  at the  nearest  sites xn.   The  r   weighting  formula  (given  by  Eq.
11-88) may be used.   The wind speed class for this grid cell is  now defined to
be
          Cw =    '-2-, if 0 <  u  < 8 m s"1;                             (4-1)
                   4, otherwise

Next, using the  fraction  o>T (x,t_) of  local  sky coverage by all cloud types
                           u i   ~  m                            ~—
and  the  local  land use distribution T(x,j),  where x refers  to  points  on the
NEROS grid  and j=l,...10 refers to  the  10 land  use  types  (see  P15), compute
the exposure class C :
                    3,   aCT < 0.2
                    2,   0.2 < aCT < 0.7
                    1,   0.7 < aCT < 1.0                                  (4-2)
                    0,   aCT = 1.0
                   -1,   afT > 0.5
                                    \ nighttime hours only
                   .-2,   arT < 0.5
                                    47

-------
In order to  account  for the nighttime heat fluxes  from  cities,  we will  limit
the minimum  value of C  to 1 for  those  cells with "urban" land  usage  (j=l)
greater than 30%, i.e.,
          if T(x,l) > 0.30,  Ce(x)  > 1.                                   (4-3a)

Similarly, to account  approximately  for  the effects of  large  bodies  of water
on the surface heat flux, we assume
                                       -I,  daylight hours
          if T(x,7)>0.6, C (x) =   \                                    (4-3b)
                          e        '0,  night.
Now compute the Obukhov length L in the cell  at x at hour tm by
          L = I  (anS + a <53) • zn  1    2       3    I  ,                  (4-4)
where
          al =  0.004349,
          a2 =  0.003724,
          bl=  0.5034,
          b2 =  0.2310,
          b3 =  0.0325.

The stability function, S (a digital version of the Pasquill stability category),
is expressed as

                   - C  +  CQ ) • Sign(CJ  ,
                      w
e
                                    48

-------
where
          Sign(Ce)
       1, if Ce > 0;
       0, if Ce = 0;
       l, if C  < 0,
Step 2
     Estimate  the  effective surface  roughness z   in  each cell  of the NEROS
grid using the following expression
                  10
               10
             x) = 2 T(x,n)z (n)/X T(x,n)
n=l
                               n=l
                                                        (4-5)
where T(x,n)  is  the fraction of the  NEROS  cell  centered at x that is in land
use  category  n,  with  n (=1,2,,.. .10)  referring to the  following use types:
1.  Urban Land                6.
2.  Agricultural Land         7.
3.  Rangeland                 8.
4.  Deciduous Forest Land     9.
5.  Coniferous Forest Land   10.
                 Mixed Forest Land (including Forested Wetland)
                 Water
                 Land Falling Outside the Study Area
                 Non-Forested Wetland
                 Mixed Agricultural Land and Rangeland
In Eq.  4-5  the surface roughness zQ(n) associated with each land use type are
the  following  (based  on  the  values  suggested by  Sheih  et  al.,  1979 with
modifications as noted below):
             (2)
             (3)
             (4)
             (5)
= 0.7 nT
= 0.2
= 0.1
= 1.0
= 1.0
                                    49

-------
             (6) = 0.7 (*2)
             (7) = 0.05
             (8) = 0.00(*3)
             (9) = 0.3
            (10) = 0.15(*4)
Notes:
     *1.   Sheib, et  al.  (1979)  recommended a value of z =lm for "metropolitan
          city."   In our  case  the "urban"  category includes  all  "built-up"
          lands,  including  residential,   industrial,  commercial,  and  other
          areas  characterized  by  building  heights much   lower  than  those
          characterized as metropolitan.   Our  choice of 0.7 m for urban areas
          is an estimated mean value.

     *2.   The  value  for  Category 6  represents a  rough average  between  the
          values suggested.
          by Shieh, et al. for marshland and ungrazed forests.

     *3.   None  of  the cells  in the NEROS  grid fall in  this category, i.e.,
          T(x,8)=0  everywhere,   and  hence  the  value  assigned  to   zQ(8)  is
          immaterial.

     *4.   Category 10  is  a  rough average  of  cropland and  rangeland values.
     The  values  of z  computed  from  Eq.  (4-5) for each  NEROS  cell  should be
recorded  in the PIF.
                                    50

-------
Step 3
     Compute the local  friction velocity u*(x,  t  )  using
          u* =
               G(z,L,z0)
                                                                        (4-6)
where k =  0.4  is  the von Karman constant; z  is  the elevation of the surface


wind observations  above ground—use
          2=10m;
                                                                   (4-7)
and G is the similarity function
     G = In
             z+z.
               if 1/L = 0
                                                   (4-8a)
G = In
             z+z
MIN(5.2r,5.2)  ,  if z < 6L and L > 0
                                                                        (4-8b)
                                                                        (4-8c)
The  Obukhov  length L  is  from (4-4),  ZQ  is the local surface roughness  from


(4-5), and
         -1        -l           (M)(40+l)
  = 2(tan x 4 - tan   4Q)  + In [/fe+i\/fe  -isL  if  L  <  0.
          4 =
                    Z+Z
          40 = U-15-)
                                    51

-------
Step 4
     Estimate the effective surface  kinematic  heat flux in each  grid  cell  at
hour t :
where T  is the surface virtual temperature (°K) in the given cell  obtained by
weighting the nearest observations T   of virtual temperature (provided by P3)
                                      _2
as  in  Step 1  above;  and g  = 9.8  ms   is the  acceleration due  to  gravity.
(Note that the T   data from P3 are in degrees Celsius.)
     Table 4-1  summarizes  the  input and output variables in each of the three
steps that comprise  this  processor, and Figure 4-1  illustrates  the processor
and its data interfaces.
                                    52

-------
               Table 4-1  Summary of input and output parameters
                          in each step of Processor P4.
Input Output
Variable Description Source Step Variable Description
"n^m) east-west surface , P3 1 L(x,t ) Obukhov Ten
gth (meters)
          wind component (ms  )
          at surface weather
          station n, hour t .

          north-south surface
          wind component at
          station n, hour t .

          location of surface
          weather station n

          land use fraction
          of category j in
          NEROS cell centered
          at x.
CFp,-(x,t ) fractional sky
          coverage, total of
          all cloud types over
          cell centered at x
          at hour t .
                                 P3
                                 PIF
                                 PIF
           in NEROS cell  centered at
           x, at hour t .
           ~           m
|LI  (x,tm)|  wind speed (m/sec) in NERI
~          cell  centered  at x, at hoi
           t  (for use in thTs Proce:
           sor only).
                                                        nr
                                 PIF
T(x,j) see above
PIF 2 z (x) effective
roughness
NEROS cell
at x.
surface
(m) of
centered
 u (x,t )Iwind speed
 r*t  ***  111
       m
L(x,t )   Obukhov length (m)
  ~  m

z (x)     surface roughness
   ~
                                  Step  1    3




                                  Step  1

                                  Step  2
                friction velocity
                (m/s) in NEROS
                cell centered at
                x, at hour t.
T,,~(x,t.J surface virtual
 \/ ri />^  ill  .       .      ~ ** _.
 vn
       m
          temperature (°C)
          at surface weather
          station n, hour t .
                                  P3
                surf ace-, heat flux
                (m °Ks"1) in NEROS
                cell at x, at hour
                        ^•w *
                V
                                    53

-------
               Table 4-1  Summary of input and output parameters
                          in each step of Processor P4.   (Concluded)

Input                                             Output
Variable     Description        Source    Step    Variable        Description


u.,t(x,t )  friction velocity      Step 3
   ~  m   (m/s) in cell at
          x at hour t .
          ~          m

L(x,t)   Obukhov length         Step 1
  ~  ra    (m) in cell at x
          at hour t .
                                     54

-------
 YYYY
                     T3

                     CO
                     <**
                     3
                     a


                     CO
                     CL w
                     i> O
                     O CO
                     « %
                     CO V

                     80
                     2 S.
                     Q. 
-------
                                   SECTION 6
                                 PROCESSOR P7

MOTION OF A VISCOUS, HYDROSTATIC FLUID OF CONSTANT DENSITY OVER IRREGULAR
TERRAIN.
     We  are  concerned here with  nighttime  flow  regimes,  where winds  in the
cold  air adjacent  to the  ground,  i.e.,  the  radiation  inversion  layer,  are
influenced  by  buoyancy,   terrain,   warm  cities,  geostrophic  forcing  and
friction.

     We  will  treat  the cold,  radiation inversion layer  as  one  of  constant
density pQ whose upper surface is described by

          Hvs(x,y,z,t) = zvs(x,y,t) - z = 0                              (7-1)

The subscript "vs"  designates  that this is  also  the  "virtual  surface" of the
atmosphere above.   We adopt this point of view later in formulating processor
Pll which describes the flow field above the inversion layer at night.   Figure
7-1  illustrates  H    and   other  terms  that we  shall  use  in the  following
analyses.

     Terrain elevation  (MSL)  is represented by zt(x,y) and z  is  the vertical
coordinate  whose  origin  is   at  seal eve!.   In  keeping   with the  level  of
simplicity adopted  in formulating the regional diffusion model, we shall treat
the  cold  air  layer  as a  two-dimensional  fluid.   That  is,   the horizontal
velocity   in   the   cold   layer  u=(u,v)  is   assumed  to   be   invariant  with

                                    56

-------
respect to  z.   Keep  in  mind that during nighttime hours  the  cold, inversion
layer considered  here is  by definition  Layer  I of the  regional  model.   The
flow  speed  in  the atmosphere  above  the cold  layer  will be  represented by
U =(U ,V ) (see Pll):  and the density in the layer above the inversion will be
~m   m  m
represented by p , where P  and Fxf represent
 the x-components  of the pressure,  Coriolis  and friction forces, respectively,
 exerted on the parcel.   Consider first the form of pressure force.
                                     57

-------
The pressure force



     We  consider the  pressure  forces  acting  on the  fluid parcel  shown in



Figure 7-2.  Since  we  assume the flow speed  to be uniform in z,  we take the



parcel to  be a vertical  column of fluid  extending from z. to the top surface
                                                          u


zys of the cold layer and having horizontal dimensions (Ax,Ay).
     Since the cold  fluid  and the air above  are  assumed to be in hydrostatic


balance, within the cold layer we have
          3p/3z = -pQg.
                                                     zvs
(7-3)
      Figure 7-2.   Air parcel  considered in  the  force balance analysis.


                                    58

-------
And since p   is  assumed to be constant,  at  any level z within the parcel  the
pressure is

          p = pvs + pog(zvs " z)                                          (7"4)
where p   is the pressure at the  top of the parcel, that is on H  .
     The total  force on  the  left  face  of the parcel due  to  the hydrostatic
pressure is

                   zvs
          fXL = Ayfpdz.
                   zt
Substituting  (7-4)   into  this expression  and  making use  of  the  definition

          h(x,y,t) = zvs(x,y,t) - zt(x,y)                                (7-5)
we get
                                                                         (7-6)
Keeping  in  mind that the  pressure  force is exerted inward  on  all  faces,  the
force on the right face of the parcel is
                         9p
          fXR = " (pvs + ~^ AzVS)(h+Ah)Ay " P09Ay(h+Ah) /2             (7-7)
                          dZ

     The force  exerted  by the ground on  the  parcel  is directed normal to the
lower face which  is inclined at an  angle 0.  with the horizontal plane and it
has a magnitude equal  to the total  fluid pressure force exerted by the fluid
on the ground,  i.e. ,
                                    59

-------
          fxt = -ft sin 0t
              = - (P09h + Pvs)(Ax2 + AZj.2)3* Ay sin 9t                    (7-8)
              = - (p0gn + PVS)AV Azt
In a similar  manner  we find that the  force on the top face  of  the parcel is
          fxvs = PVS^VS'                                               (7~9)
On combining  (7-6)  -  (7-9) and noting that 9p  /8z = -p g we obtain the total
x-component of the pressure force on the parcel:
          Fxp = fXL + fXR + fxt + fxvs
              = Ay(Azvs - Azt - Ah)pvs + pmghAyAzvs                     (7-10)
                 - pQghAy(Ah + Azt)
We can  obtain  Ah from (7-5) whereupon we  can reduce (7-10) to the final form
(for small Ax, Ay)

                         3z
          Fxp = - (Ao)gh -^ AxAy                                      (7-11)
where
          *P = po"pm                                                    (7-12)

Now the mass m of the fluid parcel is simply
          m = pQghAxay,
                                    60

-------
hence
                         37
          1 c   _   Ap __ ys                                          ,-, 10_v

          i FxP - " f g IT •                                         (7"13a)
By analogy the y-component of the pressure induced acceleration is





          I         AP     Zvs
Later  (see  Eqs.  7-34  and 7-35) we  will  add force  components  resulting from



synoptic scale pressure gradients.
The friction force



     The friction  force  on  the fluid parcel  is  the result of momentum fluxes



across  the  parcel's  boundaries.    These  fluxes  are  caused  by  molecular



diffusion and  by sub-parcel scale velocity fluctuations,  or turbulence.   For



example, at the  earth's  surface the velocity must  be zero, and thus momentum



is drained from the fluid in much the same way as heat is removed from a fluid



at a  cold,  constant temperature surface.  In the case of our flow where there



is  no  heat  transfer  into  the  fluid,   the  no-slip ground  surface  acts  to



transform  the  bulk  kinetic energy  of  the  moving  fluid  into  internal  heat



energy.  The  fluid can  also be accelerated by  influxes  of momentum from the



atmosphere above.







     Referring to  Figure 7-3 we note that the  viscous  force on the left faco



of the parcel  is





          fvl  = Ayht                                                    (7-14)
           AL       XX
                                    61

-------
where TXX is the  net flux  of  x-momentum in the  x-direction across the  left


face of the parcel.  The force on the right-hand face is
          fXR ~
- (t
    xx    8x
3tvv         3z

     Ax)(h + -R— Ax)Ay
      r -i^YX Aw
      TY«+-#" Ay
(7-15)
         Figure 7-3.  Friction forces on a fluid parcel of horizontal

                      dimensions (Ax,Ay) bounded by z   and zt.
                                                     V 5       w




Continuing  this  analysis  for  each of  the  other  faces  and  assuming that  the



slopes  of  z.  and  z   are  small  enough that the  areas  of  the bottom and  top
            t       V 5
                                    62

-------
faces of the parcel are approximately AxAy, we get
           xf
hAx
                  t  Ax
                                                        Ax2)
                                                                        (7-16)
In the  limit as  Ax  and Ay  become very  small,  the mass  m of  the parcel  is
          m = p hAxAy
                                                    (7-17)
and hence
            F   = - -
          m  xf     p
     3x     8y
                                                                        (7-18)
               t          + t
                xx h 3x      yx h 3y
For  the  lateral  stress  components  T    and t   we  will adopt  the gradient
                                      XX       jrX


transfer forms
          P0Txx
          P0V
K   §H
 xx 8x
V ay
                                             (7-19)






                                             (7-20)
where  K    and K    are elements  of  the eddy vicosity tensor,  to  be defined
       A/\       y X



later.  We will  treat the stress T^  on  the upp^r surface of the fluid as a
                                   £^




prescribed variable.  The surface stress T   will be given later.
                                    63

-------
     By analogy with (7-18) we have
      IP   =. _1  	   	
      m  yf     p  L 8x  "  8y  T h
                                                                        (7-21)


                Txy h  8x    Tyy H  8y  -"

with





          -1 r   - -K   §¥                                              /-7-o-j\
          p^  yy ~   yy §y'                                              ^     '



The stress T^ is considered to be a prescribed variable;  t  .  and  T    are  given

by



          Tzx = " P0U*COS 8                                            (7-25a)
          Tzy = " Pou*s1n 8                                            (7"25b)
where  U*  is  the  friction  velocity which  we  shall  express  in  the  form,

following Melgarejo and Deardorff (1974),



          u* = CQ(u2 + v2)15;                                            (7-26)



where Cn is the surface drag coefficient and  8 is the wind direction,
          0 = tan"1 ^.                                                   (7-27)


From (7-25) - (7-27) we obtain



          5* 4 = - Cj (u2 * v2)^                                    (7-28.)
                                    64

-------
           It       22
          -± T;W = - c£ (u^ + v
          p   zy      U
According to Melgarejo and Deardorff,

          C§ = k2 [(ln(r*) - b)2 + a2]"1                                (7-29)
                        o
where  z   is the  local  surface  roughness,  and a and b  are  functions of h/L,
where L is the Obukhov length. (Approximate forms for a and b are given later,
7-89.)
The Coriolis force
     The Coriolis force is given simply by
            Fxc = *fv                                                   (7-30)

          i Fyc ' -fu                                                   (
where f is the Coriolis parameter (=2fi sin ((», where  = latitude and fi = earth
angular speed of rotation = 2IT/24 hr  ).
The momentum equations
     On combining (7-2), (7-12), (7-18) - (7-20), (7-28a) and (7-30) we obtain
the equation governing the u component of the flow speed:
                                    65

-------
          au + ,£H + »/au - -
          at + % * vay '        ax~         xx   2    yx
               + "• 3x  +  h   3x -1 3x + "• 3y  +
                       If   S7         VS

                       J^   vs 3v

                        h   3y  3x
                            3y  3x




     For  convenience we  will  express the  shear  stress  at z    in the  form
where avs  is a  vertical  exchange  velocity  scale at  2-2   and UM  is the
       j    is a  vci i> i i_a i  CAV.IICIIIUC  VCIULIOV   o«_aic at,  L.  — L   anu u»j
       W                                                      VS      M

x-component  of the  "observed" flow in the layer  above  z    (see processor Pll,


Stage UV).





     Substituting (7-33) into (7-32) we obtain  after  rearranging terms






          §"  + r,,   8K**   ^ azvs-, 3u  . ,    9Kyx    ^x ^vs, 3u

          3t    L    3x       h  3x  J 3x   L    3y     h   3y  J 3y







              - *xx ^ - Kvx ^ * -R CCD <"2  +  ^ + C^ •
                    3x     y  3y


                                                                         (7-34)
                                          |!   +           .  ,
                                       w  UM  +   3y  3^  + Ky
                                                            x i
                      zvs avn  .  i  apsi

                   h   3y  3xJ    p   3x
                                     66

-------
Likewise we have
                                   -.    +  ,  .      -         -.
          at        ax     h    ax  J ax    L     ay     h   ay J ay
                              a? + *
                 Q ^p '   3y     u    h aw  M    3x  8y    xy
                          ffvs §u,  .  1
                       h   3x 3yJ    p
In Eqs. (7-34) and  (7-35)  the  last  terms  on  the  right-hand side represent the
accelerations caused  by synoptic  scale  pressure  gradients  in  the boundary
layer, and p ,  is the  sea-level  pressure.
     Next we derive an equation  for  the  virtual  surface elevation z   (x,y,t).
The fluid depth equation
     Let Q be a point on the virtual  surface  (cf  7-1)

          Hvs(x,y,z,t) = zvs(x,y,t)  - z = 0                             (7-36)

and let  its  coordinates  at  time t  be (XQ, y , ZQ).   If  the  surface is moving
with a  velocity  v    = (u  , vvgj wyg)  at the  point Q, then  at the later time
t  + At Q will have the coordinates
 o      ^
          (xr ylf  Zl) = (XQ -H uvsAt, yo + v^At, ZQ + w^At).          (7-37)
                                    67

-------
Since by definition Q lies on the surface HVS at all times we must have
          Hvs
-------
         AS  =
                                                              (7-44)
                                                          Hvs = zvs(x,y.t)-z =
                                               Ax"
            Figure 7-4.  Projection of the horizontal rectangle (Ax,Ay)
                         onto the surface H   centered at point Q.
If the slope of z   is small, say
 vs
8x
                   3z
                     vs
                         «i
                                                               (7-45)
then (7-44) can be approximated by
                      ft 7
As * AxAy
                                              , if 7-45 holds.
                                                              (7-46)
     Let  v,  be the  velocity of  the  fluid  at  the point  Q  on H  .   Then  the

normal downward component  of the fluid velocity relative  to H   at point Q is
            _  -1
                                                                         (7-47)
                                    69

-------
     Making use of (7-42) we can write (7-47) in the equivalent form

                                                                        (7'48)
where
     The  total   downward volume  flux of  fluid  crossing  As  is vAs.   Using
(7-46), (7-48) and

we have
                     dH
                     ~dt
vAs = AxAy -~                                               (7-51)
Thus, the net downward flux or fluid per unit horizontal area is

          "vs • TF                                                    <7-52>
or
                                    = V                               (7-53)
where (u, v, w) is the fluid velocity on H  .
                           ~~              V S
     An   expression   for  nvs   can  be   derived   from  the   first  law  of
thermodynamics.   Assuming  that all  sources and  sinks  of heat  are  on the
boundaries  of  the fluid, e.g., ra'diative  cooling  on  HVS and heat transfer to
the terrain surface H., we can write the first law in the form
                                    70

-------
          de _ ae    ae .  ae  . .ae _
             -    + u- +  v    + w-
                                                             (7-54)
where 6 is the potential  temperature defined as
      p R/cp
e = T(£)   p
      p
                                                                       (7-55)
where P  is  a reference  pressure  (usually 1000 mb) and p  is  local  pressure.


Following the procedure  described in Part  1,  Section 2  for  obtaining layer


averaged variables,  we get from  (7-54)
                                 + V
                                     3y    h
                                    •ar
.t    "^
t       cit~
                                   vs
                                                                       (7-56)
                                           V-VH f
                                           ~ ~ vs
                                                 vs
                                           = 0
                                                           vs
where TT denotes averaging over  the terrain surface Ht, T~7 denotes averaging
over the virtual  surface H  ,
          h(x,y,t)  = zvs(x,y,t)  -  zt(x,y)
                                                             (7-57)
and
                i ( rvs
          <6> H r I   edzda
                  Az,
and A is the area of a grid cell  in  the model
                                                             (7-58)
     Look at the  first  term  in brackets  in  (7-56).  In analogy with (7-52) we
have
          dH

                                                                       (7-59)
                                    71

-------
where n.  is the downward fluid volume flux at the  ground.   Thus

              t
where w'e1   is the kinematic heat flux at the ground.


     Consider now  the  second term  in brackets  in  (7-56).   Since 3zt/3t =  0

          _t
and since n.  =  0 (there is no net  flux  of air through the terrain),  we have


             t
          dH.    	t
              = F   = 0.                                               (7-61)
     The  third term  in brackets  in  (7-56) can  be written with  the aid  of

(7-52) as

          	vs
          ~dH^     	vs
          *!T   =envs                                                (7-62)


and the fourth term becomes, using (7-52) and (7-53),

                    vs             32
                            [nvs - -§£*]                                (7-63)
where  n    and 2    are  taken to  be averages over  an area  A  of a  grid  cell

surrounding any given point.
     Substituting  (7-60)  -  (7-63) into  (7-56) and  collecting  terms we  get



          dH       -,           	vs
          •£  + ± [-wT0To - 0nvs  + <6>HVS] = 0                      (7-64)


where


          dt = 3t   "ax   V3y
                                    72

-------
     Following Zeman (1979) we  shall  assume that within the cold fluid, i.e.,
the nighttime  stable boundary  layer,  the potential temperature  has  a linear
variation with height,  namely
                                 z-zt
          8 = 8h " (8h " 8o)(1 " ~fi  ^                                  (7"66)
where 0.  is the  value  of 6  at the  elevation  h above  ground and  0  is the
potential temperature at  the  surface.  At elevation h  the  turbulent heat and
momentum fluxes are  negligibly small; so if we  take  this to be the elevation
of the virtual surface z  , then the  kinematic heat flux on H   is simply that
                        V &                                   V5
due to the motion of the surface itself.  In this case we have
          _ vs
          envs   =ehnvs.               if nvs > o                      (7-6?)
Also, on integrating (7-66) in the manner of (7-58) we get
          <0> = h (0h + 0Q)                                             (7-68)
and hence
          d,,         d,,        d,,
                     at  h
     Substituting (7-67) and (7-68) into (7-64) we obtain
Making use of (7-69) in this equation we obtain

          Hvs = B(he-h)                                                 (7-71)
where
                  -.   d
                      K (eh + V
                                    73

-------
                 2wTern
               d -
     It  is  instructive to compare  (7-71)  -  (7-72) with models of  the stable
boundary  layer  developed  by others.   Earlier efforts  have considered  only
homogeneous surfaces with  no mean  vertical motion (w=0).   In this case (7-71)
reduces to (see 7-53 and 7-57)

          f£ = B(he - h).                                                (7-73)
and d^/dt •* 8/3t.   Nieuwstadt and Tennekes (1981)  (NT) recently proposed

          f£=B'(h;-h)                                                 (7-74)
where
                                                                       (7-75.)
                    2
          h; = c4 fG sina cosa                                         (7.?5b)
where f  is  the Coriolis parameter, G is  the  geostrophic wind speed, a is the
angle between the geostrophic  and the  surface  winds,  and  c.  is  a constant
whose value  is estimated by  Nieuwstadt  and Tennekes to be  about  0.15.   Good
agreement was  found  between  the predictions of this model  and observations of
the boundary layer depth h.

     On  comparing  (7-71) - (7-72) with  the NT model (7-74) -  (7-75)  we find
that except  for the  constant 4/3 in B1,  the two models are the same, provided
                                    74

-------
that the surface heat flux satisfies

          |wTgr ( = 0^5 fG2sina cosa                                    (

     To determine whether this is a plausible relationship,  we  note  first  that
for large values of h/L, where L is the Obukhov length
                                                                        (7-77)
                gk vF0J

Brost and Wyngaard (1978) found

          G2sinacosa = u£ ()2 (*)                                     (7-78)
where k = 0.4 in the von Karman constant.   Substituting (7-77)  and (7-78)  into
(7-76) we find that (7-76) implies

          h = 0.8 (^)%                                                (7-79)

But this is just the formula that Zilitinkevich (1972) derived  for h from
similarity theory [in particular h = Cg (%=)]; and thus we conclude that
(7-76) is a plausible expression, at least for large h/L.
     Having an  expression now  for  q   ,  let us return to  (7-53)  and consider
the vertical velocity w.   Since the cold layer is  shallow we  can approximate
the continuity equation by
Integrating from z. to z   and using the assumption that u and v are invariant
with respect to z, we get
                                    75

-------
     Since there is no  flux  F of fluid through the ground,  we see from (7-61)
that
          9zt    8z.     3zf
          8T + "55T * V - «t • °                                    V-™
Solving (7-82) for w.  and using the result in (7-81) we obtain

          u,   - .8zt .  t,8zt   . rau .  8vn                                ,, 0,v
          wvs - "alT + V8y- ' *% + 3y]                                (7"83)

where h is given by (7-57).  Substituting (7-83) into (7-53) we obtain finally
where
                  - zt                                                 (7-84b)
This is the model equation that we shall use to obtain z  .
Simplified model equations
     Going back to the momentum equations (7-34) and (7-35) and recalling that
z   is the elevation where vertical heat and momentum fluxes due to turbulence
are negligible, we assume that
          avs~ 0.                                                       (7-85)

Let  us also  assume  in this  "first generation" model  that the  lateral  eddy

                                    76

-------
viscosity tensor  K is  also  zero.   With  these assumptions  (7-34)  and (7-35)
reduce to

                            1 8psl
                           5* T*l - fv                                  (7-86)
                        "ap
                           sl
where p ,  is  the sea-level pressure and  h  and z   are given by (7-84), which
we rewrite here for completeness:
               h = zvs - ZT.                                           (7-88b)
The set  of  equations (7-86) - (7-88) is a closed system that we can solve for
u, v,  and  h given CQ> Ap,  p  ,  p , ,  z,. and q  .   Earlier we described how nvs
is related  to the  surface  heat flux w'e' and the  temperature distribution 0
within the  cold  layer (see 7-71 and 7-72); and we presented formulas that one
might  use to  derive these variables (see  7-66 and  7-76).   Below we summarize
the  expressions  that we  propose to  use for these  and the  other parameters
listed above in the  first generation version of processor P7.
                                    77

-------
(1)  nvs =  Eq.  7-71,72 with Q^ and 0Q  from  surface and upper air mete-

           orological  data (Processors PI and  P3);  vTe7 = Q = kinematic
           heat flux at the  ground  (from Processor P4);
(2)  Zy(x,y) = 30 x 45  min (1 at- Ion)  smoothed  terrain heights  (meters,
                                                 v

               MSL,  from P7)
(3)  CD = k{[ln(^) -b]2 + a2}'*5                                  (7-89a)
                 o


     where k = 0.4 is the von Karman  constant;  h  is  the  local

     solution of Eq.  (7-88);  z  is  the  surface  roughness (m),  from

     P4;

                   T5, if L>0,

               a =i
                   i'l,  otherwise;                                 (7-89b)

                   f5, if L>0,
               b                                                  (7-89c)
                    4, otherwise;
     and L  is  the Obukhov  length (from P4).   Note that  L,  z ,  h,  and

     hence a,  b,  and CQ  are defined  for  each grid  point in the  model

     domain.    (Eq.   89   is   based  on  values   given   by   Melgarejo  and

     Deardorff, 1974.)
(4)     :     -.                                           (7-90.)
     where 6, and 6  are from Processors PI and P3;
(5)  p0-fl                                                     (7-90b)


     where p  ,  is the  sea-level  pressure (from  P3);  Ty  is  the  virtual

     temperature (from P3); and R is the gas  constant.
                               78

-------
                                           _2
     (6)  g and  f are  gravity (9.8 m  sec  ) and  the  Coriolis parameter  (=
          2ftsin), respectively.   Here  Q =  2jt/(24-60*60) sec'1 and $  is  the
          local latitude in radians.
Later we  outline the  stages  of calculations  that are needed to  compute  the
parameters  listed  above and  the  additional  quantities, not used  in  the flow
simulation, that P7 must  provide  to the model and to other processors in the
network.
Solution of the u, v, and z   equations
     Each  of  the   Eqs.   (7-86)  -  (7-88),  which  govern  u,  v  and  zys,
respectively, has the form

                     v   + br = s                                       <
where U and V are functions of F.  We will approach the task of solving (7-91)
numerically using the technique developed in Section 9 of Part 1.   That is, we
assume that  within each small time  interval  At,  the coefficients U  and  V in
(7-91) can  be treated  as  independent variables  whose values  are  determined
using the value  of r at the  beginning of the interval, t  say.  In this  case
the solution of (7-91) can be expressed in the closed form
          r(x,to+At) = fp(x,t0+At x',t0)r(xit0)dx'
                                                                        (7-92)
                   VAt
                     p(x,t +At|xU')S(x',t«)dt'dx'
                                    79

-------
where p is the Green's function of (7-91).   In the present instance it has the
form
          P(x,y,t|xjyit0) = 6[x-(x'+x)]6[y-(y'+y)]e"b(t"to)              (7"93)

where 6[x] is the delta function and
                              t
                :|x',y',t0) =  U[x'  + x(t'),  y1  + y(t'),t']dt'          (7-94a)
          x =
                              t
            = y(t|x',y',tn) =fv[x'  + x(t'),y'  + y(t'),t']dt'.         (7-94b)
                         oj
                             •
                              t.
     The assumptions that U  and  V are approximately constant during  the time
step At should be valid provided  that At is  small  enough to  satisfy
          IT]  -5
                    At <
-------
exceeds unity,  flow discontinuities  such  as hydraulic jumps  will  occur, and
these  will  cause  considerable problems in  the numerical  model.   We  do not
expect  the  nighttime  flows that  we  will  simulate  to become  supercritical
often.  When  it  happens,   it  will  occur  in isolated  portions  of  the model
region  and  we  will  be  able  to  anticipate it  by  monitoring  the  temporal
behavior of the  flow.   In those grid  cells where  we predict that the flow is
about to become  supercritical,  we propose  to prevent  it  by applying enhanced
eddy viscosity.

     A  detailed  description of  the  numerical  scheme  used to solve the flow
model equations, specifically equations reducible to the form (7-91), is given
in Appendix  A of  this  section.    The  scheme  described there  is  the same one
that  is  used to solve  the  transport and diffusion  component  of  the regional
pollution model  equations.   The  scheme is an  explicit, 5th order  space, 1st
order time algorithm that permits the model domain to be treated in piece wise
fashion.  This  is  a particularly valuable  feature in models such as ours that
are too large to load entirely into the computer memory.

     One of the  principal  problems associated  with  the numerical  solution of
equations  like   (7-86)  -  (7-88)  is  the  treatment of  the lateral  boundary
conditions.    Since  no  generally  valid  method  exists   for  specifying  the
boundary values  required by the difference  equations,  a  common  practice in
mesoscale flow  models  is  to place  the boundaries far from the  edges of the
spatial  domain  of  interest.  Another approach  is to  imbed the  flow model
within  another  one  of coarser  resolution  which  provides boundary  values.
                                    81

-------
Neither of these  methods  of circumventing the boundary problem can be used in
our studies because  the  additional  computer storage and  time  that they would
require would  make the overall simulation  effort  impractical.   Consequently,
we have formulated  an  approximation of the boundary conditions,  described in
Appendix  B of this  section,  that  is  sufficient  for  treating  the  limited
periods of concern to us in modeling the nighttime boundary layer flow.

     Below we  outline the  various  stages  of  computation that  are necessary
within processor P7.
StaQe ZT
     The  "raw"  topography data available  in  the PIF will be  denoted here by
zt(\,).   These represent  terrain elevations  averaged  over  5  min x  5 min
latitude - longitude sectors.  The regional model and the flow model developed
in  this section require the  elevation  z.(A.,)  averaged over 30  min  x  45 min
latitude - longitude sectors.

     Let  zt(I,J) denote  the  value of the 30 x 45 min smoothed terrain at grid
point (1,0) (column I, row 0) of the NEROS region.  Then

          ztd,0)=£       z,(i,j)                                     (7-97)
           1                  r
where the summation is over the 54, 5 min x 5 min cells surrounding grid point
(1,0)  (see  figure 7-5).   Note that  the  54 cell  smoothing area  used in the
definition of zt(I,0) overlaps the smoothing areas associated with the 8 NEROS
               U
grid points nearest the point  (1,0).
                                    82

-------
     The input and output requirements  of Stage  ZT are summarized in Table  7-1

later in this section.










®_.,
















(I,J)















©_.
— ,j
M.J+1
®...
-
(1+1. J)
®, -.-







           Figure 7-5 .   Illustration of the 54 5 min x 5 min cells
                        that are used in the calculation of zt(I,J).
Stage DELRO

     The parameter Ap, is used in this and other processors as an indicator of

the presence  of an inversion layer at  the ground.   This parameter will  be a

scalar and a  function of time only in  the first generation model.   We define

                       1, if surface inversion is present
          Ap,(t ) =  )      over most of the model region

                      .0,  otherwise.
(7-98)
Under this  definition  the  magnitude of Ap1  is  an  indicator of the density of
                                    83

-------
air in  Layer  1 relative to that in Layer 2.   In the first generation model we
will compute Ap,(t ) using the following procedure.
where
          (1) Define
              6Pl(tn) =
+1, if Ap
-1, if Ap-j^C^
 0, otherwise
                                      ) = 0 and Q(tn) < 0;
              = 1 and TD~EF(tn) <0;
          Q(tn)=IIQ(i,j,tn)
(7-99)
is the surface kinematic heat flux (°Kmsec  ) summed over all grid points (i,j)
of the model domain, and TDEF is the mean "temperature deficit" of the cold layer
which we approximate by
          TDEF(t ) = allhL. d.j.t ) - 112  q(i,j,n)At.
                n     ... max       ID    ijn=0
                                             (7-100)
In this expression h    is the depth of the cold layer at the time the surface
heat flux reverses, i.e.,
                            h(i,j,tm), if Q(i,j,tm) > 0
                                       and. QOJ.Vp < 0;
                            0, otherwise
                                             (7-101)
The value assigned to h_,v before the surface heat flux reversal, in this case
                       uiaX
0, is immaterial since the value is never used.  In (7-100), the variable q is
given by
!(U,tm), if Q(i,j,y > 0;
I, otherwise
                                                                        (7-102)
                                    84

-------
The  constant  a  that appears  In  (7-100)  is a  temperature gradient  that  we
define in Stage ETA.

     (2) With SpjCt^) determined by (7-99) a functional form for ApjCt ) that
is consistent with (7-98) is the following:

          Apl(tn) = Apl(tn-l) + 6pl(tn}                               (7-103a)
with initial value
          Ap-^) = 0                                                 (7-103b)
and
          t0 = 1200 EST.                                              (7-103c)
Under  definition  (7-103) we  assume in effect  that an  inversion layer forms
over the  entire model domain  at the  hour the average  surface  heat flux over
the whole domain becomes negative; and it disappears everywhere at the hour t
that TDEF,  defined  by   (7-100),  first becomes  negative.   This  is  clearly a
crude approximation  in  a model such as ours which spans 15° of longitude, but
to relax  it would require  an  escalation  in the complexity  of  the flow field
description that would put the overall modeling effort beyond the scope of the
"first generation" effort.

     In  summary,  stage  DELRO  computes  the  single scalar  variable Ap,(t ),
n=0,...N  using  Eqs.  (7-99)   -  (7-103).    This  variable  is used throughout
processor P7  as  an  indication of when specific functions are to be performed,
and  it  is  an  output of  P7 that guides the use of the fields generated here in
other processors in the  model  network,  A  list of all the input and outputs of
this stage is given later in Table 7-1.

                                    85

-------
Stage ETA
     This stage operates only during those time steps t  when Ap-,(t )=1 and it
operates  in  unison  with  Stage  FLOMOD,  described  below,  which solves  the
equation set (7-86) - (7-88).  In this stage we compute nvs> using Eqs. (7-71)
and  (7-72),  and  Ap/p  ,  using  (7-90a).    Both  of  these calculations  require
values  of  the  temperature  6.  at  the  top  of the  cold layer.   Rather than
attempt to estimate these from upper air data,  which would be a difficult task
given the  shallow depth of  the cold  layer and the limited  frequency of the
upper air  measurements,  we  propose instead to estimate 0.  from the observed
ground-level temperatures 6  assuming a constant temperature lapse
          |f = a                                                       (7-104)

in the cold layer.  The observations reported by Godowitch and Ching (1980) of
the nighttime  surface  inversion in rural areas around St.  Louis indicate that
a typical value is
          a = 1.2 °C/100m.                                              (7-105)
Using (7-104) we have
          0.  = 0  + ah                                                 (7-106)
           n    o
with a given by (7-105); and hence from (7-90a)
                _ ah      ~ ah
                          "  26?                                       (
We will estimate the surface temperature QQ at each grid point (I,J) using the
virtual temperature  observations  Tyn,  n=l,...N made at  the  M surface weather
stations.  We assume here that the T"vn(°C) are available from Processor P3 for
each hour.  In this case   (M.t) is computed as follows:
                                    86

-------
                        N
                        T  -2
                           N   -2
                           I  r
                          n=l  n.
                                                                       (7-108)
where
                                                                       (7"109)
is  the distance  between grid  cell  (I,J)  and  the site  (xn,y ) of  surface
station n.   Equation (7-108)  should  be evaluated  at  each time  step  t  that
     The  inversion  layer growth  rate  parameter n   can now  be  computed from
(7-71)  and (7-72)  for  each  grid  cell  and  time step.   Since  the  physical
assumptions on which  the governing equations (7-86)  - (7-88) are based do not
hold in  situations  where the fluid is being  heated  from below,  we must limit
the minimum value  of  n   to zero.  The  net  effect of this is to assume that
over warm  cities  at night,  the surface heat flux is  never positive.   Thus, we
have
          nvsd,J,tm) = max (0, B[he - h(I,J,y]}                     (7-110)
where
          B = -
                                    87

-------
and
                2Q(I,J,t)
In these expressions we can use the approximations
          8T2 - 9°(I>J>tm)At0(I>J>Vl)                                <7-112>
          3h    n(I.J,tm) - h(ItJ>Vl)
          at	At	                                (7"113)
where 6   is given  by  (7-108) and h  is  the  solution of Eq. 7-88  provided by
Stage FLOMOD.
     Note in (7-lllb) that we use estimates of the surface heat flux Q in each
cell  rather  than the  expression  (7-76)  discussed earlier in  the  estimate of
h .    The  latter is  based  on the assumption of homogeneous, flat  terrain and
homogeneous  heat flux  and  hence  estimates  of  w'6 '   derived from  it  using
observations of  the  ageostrophic  wind angle a acquired from wind observations
would probably be erroneous.
     In  summary,  Stage ETA  provides  values of Ap/P0  (using  (7-107))  at each
grid point and time step that Ap-, = 1; values of nvs at the same locations and
times using  (7-110);  and  the surface temperature 0Q  at all  hours.  A list of
the input and output parameters of this Stage is provided in Table 7-1.

-------
Stage PCD
     This  stage  computes  the  pressure  and  drag coefficient  terms  that are
required in the momentum  equations  (7-86)  and (7-87).   Therefore, this  stage
operates only at times t  when  Ap-iCO  = 1.

     We assume that the  sea- level  pressure data  p  ,    measured at  each of the
                                                 s I ,n
n=l,2,...N surface  weather stations is  available  for each  hour t  that PCD
operates.   At  each  of  these  hours   sea-level  pressure  values  should  be
interpolated  at each grid  point  in  the  model  domain  using the  following
formula:

                        1 P,l.n>si»'J>V  • —^
                           I r"1
                          n=l"
where
          rn =  [(IAX - xn)2 + (JAy - y^2]55                           (7-115)

and N is the number of surface stations at which sea- level  pressure  values  are
available.    Using  the  same  interpolation  formula,  derive  estimates of  the
surface air density at each grid point at hour t :
                        N
                        S
                           n
                       n=l n
where r   is  given  by (7-115) and p  is the density at surface station  n  (from
P3).
                                    89

-------
     At each grid point we require values of the functions
                1 apsl
          P  £    -                                                   (7-117a)
                1 9psl
          py ' ^ TT                                                (7-117b)
We will approximate  the spatial  derivatives that appear  in  (7-117) using the
fourth-order finite  difference scheme  discussed in the appendix to Section 8.
With those expressions we get
          Px (I.J.y = A[p0(I,J,tm)]"1{2/3[psl(I-H,J,tm)
                      - ps1(I-l,J,tm)] - l/12[psl(H-2,J,tm)            (7-118)

                      - Ps1(I-2,J,tm)]}(Ax)"1
          Py(I,J,tm) = A[p0(I,J,tm)]"1{2/3[Psl(I>J-H,tm)
                     - psl(I,J-l,tm)] - l/12Cpsl(I,J+2,tm)             (7-119)
                     - Psl(I,J-2,tm)]}(Ay)"1
where Ax  and  Ay are the x  and  y separation distances  (m)  of  the grid points
nearest (I,J);  and  A = 100 is the conversion factor required to transform the
                                                          -1   ~2
sea-level pressure  values  from  units of millibars to kg m  sec  '.  (Note that
                      _o
p   has  units of  kg m   and  Ax and   Ay have units of meters.)  The gridded
functions P   and  P   are outputs of  Stage  PCD each hour that Ap-, = 1; and the
           x      y                                            i
sea-level pressure p , given by  (7-114) is an output for all hours.
     The  computation of  the  drag coefficient value Cg  in  each grid cell and
hour   requires a  straightforward  implementation  of   Eq.   (7-89).    We have
                                    90

-------
                              hd.J.t )    2   2 _h
          CD d,J,tm) =k{[ln ( z (I>J^ )-b]2 +a2} *                    (7-120)

where k=0.4; z  is the surface roughness (m) of cell  (I,J);  h is the depth (m)
of the surface inversion layer in (I,J) at t  (from Stage FLOMOD);  and
                5, if L(I,J,t ) > 0;
          a = i              m
                -1, otherwise

               -5, if L(I,J,t ) > 0;
          b = {   .            m
                4, otherwise.
Here  L  is the  Obukhov  length  (m)  in cell  (I,J)  at hour t   (from P4).   The
coefficient C.,(I,J,t )  is  the third and final output of Stage PCD.   (Refer to
Table 7-1 for a summary of the inputs and outputs of this Stage.)
Stage IBC
     This stage computes boundary and initial values of u, v, and h for use in
solving the  system  of equations (7-86) -  (7-88).   For this purpose we assume
that initially  and  along the boundaries of the simulation region the velocity
field is in equilibrium with the friction, pressure and Coriolis forces.   That
is, we assume (cf 7-86, 87)

           2r2
          —2	  = -Pv + fs (sine)                                  (7-121)
           9 9
           ^CoSin 6
                    = -P  - fs (cose)                                  (7-122)
                                    91

-------
              2     2 ^
where  s =  (u  + v )^  is the  flow  speed and  0 is its  direction.   Cross-



multiplying (7-121) by (7-122) we get





          P¥ sine - Pw cose = fs                                       (7-123)
           *         y



and  on squaring  (7-121)  and (7-122),  adding  the results  and Baking  use of



(7-123) we obtain
          s4  4
                + fV - (P/ + Pv/) = 0.                              (7-124)

                           x     y
Since all parameters except s in (7-124) are known, we can solve this equation



for the  flow  speed s at each grid  point and then substitute the results into



(7-123) to obtain the corresponding flow directions 0.







     Next, we define the time tKQ:






          tKQ = time during a given 24- hour period when


                Ap.^ changes from 0 to 1.                               (7-125)








This marks  the  initial  instant at which  the equations (7-86) - (7-88) apply,



and it  is the function of Stage  IBC  to provide the necessary values of u, v,



and h at  this time.  Thus,





          if t  = t,,n, Stage IBC computes initial values as follows:
              Ml    1\U




                   h(i,j,tKO) = h0 = 30m,                              (7-126)





                   u(1,j,tK(J) = s(i,j,tKO)cos0(i,j,tKQ)                (7-127)





                   v(i,j,tKO) = s(i,j,tKO)sin0(i,j,tKO)                (7-128)
                                    92

-------
where  s(i,j,t.,Q)  is the  solution of  (7-124) at  grid  point (i,j) based  on



values of P , P  , Cn and  h (from 7-126) at that point; and 6(i,i,t,.,n) is the
           X   y    U                                               I\U


corresponding solution  of  Eq.  (7-123).







          if t  > tj,Q and  Ap-,(t  )  = 1, Stage IBC computes



                     boundary values of u, v, and  h as follows:
                   °Bc(i'J'V = AT  MU.V - "(u.Vi)]          (7-130)

In  these  equations (i,j)  are  boundary points only.   Also,  n   is  given  by
                                                              V 5


Stage ETA  and u and  v are computed on the  boundaries  using  the  same method



employed to  obtain the  initial  conditions,  (7-127)  and (7-128)  above.   We



should  point  out  that  in  our  treatment  of the  boundary  conditions  (see



Appendix B  to this chapter),  we  give the values  of u,  v,  and h  at inflow



boundary points in terms of  their initial  values,  i.e., h(i,j,tKQ) etc., and



we  require  that  the  subsequent  time  derivatives  of  these variables  be



specified,  namely







          H, U, and V.





     Stage IBC provides the boundary conditions (7-129)  -  (7-131) at each time



step t   that Ap,  =  1.  The input  and output parameters for this stage are



summarized in Table 7-1.
                                    93

-------
Stage H1HO
     This  stage performs  the  final  operations  in  the calculation  of  the
elevation z,,  of the top  surface of  Layer  1 of  the regional model; and it
converts  this  and other  surface elevations  into  pressure  coordinates.   The
specific operations are  defined below.

                      rn(i,j,t ),  if Ap,(t  ) = 1;
                      \         m        I m                          (7-132)
          VU'VH
                      (_max{100, min{500,  L(i,j,tm)   }},

                              if Ap,(t )  = 0.

Here h  is the  solution  of (7-88), as  provided by  stage  FLOMOD,, and L  is  the
Obukhov length, used earlier.   The value  assigned  h,  by Eq.  (7-132) when Ap-,  =
0  is  constrained  to  prevent  the  Layer  1 depth   from   approaching  zero
thickness — which could  happen in extremely unstable  conditions when   L  •*
0 — and  also  to prevent Layer  1 from becoming as  deep  as  the mixed  layer —
which  would  force  the  thickness   of  Layer 2   to   zero.    Although  these
constraints  are not  necessary  in  principle, they  are applied  to  prevent
numerical problems in the  code which might arise  as cell thicknesses  approach
arbitrarily small values.
     The virtual surface elevation zvs is computed as follows:
                        f  zT(i,j) + MlJ.t ), if Apx (t ) = 1;
          zvs(i,j,tj=     T         l      m        l   m            (7-133)
           VS      m    I  zT(i,j),    if AP-L (tm) = 0.
Since ZT is given in meters above sea-level, the values of z1 and zys obtained
from (7-132) and (7-133) are also in units of m (MSL).
                                    94

-------
     Several  other  processors  require  the  surface  elevations  in  pressure
coordinates.  These are computed as follows:
                                       Zi(1,j,t )g
                                         -   1                    (7"134)
                                       RdT(U,tm)
where g = 9.8m sec"2, Rd = 287m2 sec"2 °K"1, z^ = ZT + h-^ and
                            i,j,tm) + 0.0065zt(i,j)] .                  (7-135)
In this expression 0.0065 °K m   is the temperature lapse rate of the Standard
Atmosphere which,  for altitude calculation purposes, we  assume  holds between
ground elevation and sea-level.
     Similarly

          Pvs(i,j,tm) = Eq. (7-134) with ^ replaced by zvs            (7-136)

     Finally, in accordance with  the analyses presented in Appendix B of Part
1 of this report, we shall prescribe the depth h  of Layer 0 to be
          no(i,j,tm) = h^iJ.y/lO.                                  (7-137)
The inputs and outputs of Stage H1HO are summarized in Table 7-1.
Stage SIG
     This stage estimates the fractions O--Q and a-j-g of surfaces zi(x«y>tm)
[Zj(x,y) + h (x,y,t )] that are penetrated by terrain.
     Referring  to  Fig. 7-5  which illustrates the process  of  computing Zj in
Stage ZT, we define
                                    95

-------
          o-T1(I,J,t ) = -i 2-\(1,j,t )                                (7-138)
           11      m    b4 i,jeD(I,J)m

where \ is defined as
                         l,if Mi.j) ^ Zi^.J.tn,);                    (7-139)
                               C         -L      III
                         0, otherwise

and  the  summation in  (7-138)  is over  all  54  of  the 5 min x  5  min subcells
contained within the 3 x 3 grid cell area in which Zj (I,J) is defined.

     For simplicity in this first generation model  we will assume

          o-TOd,J,tm) =aT1(I,J,tm),                                   (7-140)

where  ov.,  is  given by  (7-138).   The inputs  and  outputs  of Stage SIG are
summarized in Table. 7-1.
Stage FLOMOD
     This  stage solves  the  system  of  equations  (7-86)  - (7-88)  using the
numerical  method  discussed  earlier,  beginning  on  page  79.   A  detailed
description of  the  numerical  procedures used to solve  the equations is given
in the appendices to this chapter; and the input and output parameters of this
stage are summarized in Table 7-1.

     A schematic view  of the interrelationships among the various stages that
comprise Processor P7 is given in Figure 7-6, page  130.
                                    96

-------
               Table 7-1.   Summary of the input and output requirements
                           of each stage of Processor P7.
 Input
Variable
               Description
                                   Source     Stage
 Output
Variable
Description
QdJ.t )
             surface kinematic -.x
             heat flux (°K m s"i;
             at grid cell  (i,j)
             at hour t_
                                     P4      DELRO    Ap1(t|n)
              surface inversion
              indicator:  = 1 if
              an inversion is
              present over the
              entire model domain
              at hour t •  = 0
              otherwise.
             depth of cold layer     Stage
             (m) at grid point       FLOMOD
             (i,j) at hour t
             5 min x 5 min
             smoothed terrain
             elevation (m MSL)
             centered at longitude
             A, latitude .
                                     RAW
                                             ZT
              30 min x 45 min
              smoothed terrain
              centered at NEROS
              grid cell (i,j).
             virtual temperature     P3
             (°C) at surface
             weather station
             n=l,... N at hour
             V
             depth of cold layer     Stage
             (m)  at grid point       FLOMOD
             (i,j) at hour t
                                             ETA      Ap/p (i,j,t )  buoyancy parameter at
                                            (operates               grid point (i,j)  at
                                            only when               time t
                                                      nvs(i,j,tn)
                                                      e0(U,tn)
                                                                    cold layer  growth
                                                                    rate (m  s"1)  at  grid
                                                                    point (i ,j) at time
                                                                    V
                                                                    Surface  temperature,
Q(i,j,t )
       m
             surface heat flux
             (°K m sec"1)
                                     P4
"sl,n
-------
                                    Table  7-1.  (Continued)
 Input
Variable
  Description
Source   Stage
 Output
Variable
  Description
KI.J.V
z0(I,J)
depth (meter) of
cold surface layer
in cell (I,J) at
hour m.

surface roughness
(m) in cell  (I,J)

Obukhov length (m)
in cell (I,J) at
hour m.
 Stage    PCD     Cn(I,J,tJ
 FLOMOD  (cont.)   u      m
 P4


 P4
Psl(i,j,tm)
drag coefficient
(dimensionless)
in cell (I,J) at
hour m.

sea-level pressure i
cell (i,j) at hour t
Pv(i>j»t )   horizontal  pressure     Stage  IBC
        m
force term (see 7-118)  PCD


horizontal pressure     Stage
force term (see 7-119)  PCD
                                         h(i,j,tKO)
                                                            'KO
                                initial  depth (m)
                                of the cold layer in
                                cell (i,j)
                                                      u(i,j,t,,n)     initial  east-west
                                                                    flow  speed  (m  sec   )
                                                                    component in cell
CD(i,j,tm) drag coefficient
nwcO',J>t_) cold layer growth
vs m rate (m/sec)
z-rO'.J) elevation (m, MSI)
of smoothed terrain
Stage
PCD
Stage
ETA
Stage H1HO
ZT
v(i,j,tKO) initial north-south
flow speed component
in cell (1,j)
Hor-O'jj.t ) time derivative (m/s
BL m of cold layer depth
at boundary cell
(i,j) at time tffl
URr(i,j,t ) time derivative of
BC m the east-west flow
component on the
boundary at time t
VRr(i,j,t ) time derivative of
BU m the north-south flow
component at boundar
point_2(i,j) (units:
m sec )
h-,(i,j,t ) thickness (m) of
1 m Layer 1 in cell (i.j!
             in grid cell (i,j)
                                                       at time t
                                        98

-------
                                    Table 7-1.  (Continued)
 Input
Variable
               Description
                       Source   Stage
                                                       Output
                                                      Variable
                                                          Description
hd.j.V
L(i,j,tm)
depth (m) of cold
surface layer
Obukhov length (m)

sea-level pressure
(mb) in cell (i,j)
at hour t

surface temperature
(°K) in cell (i,j),
hour t
      m
                                     Stage    H1HO
                                     FLOMOD   (cont.)
                                     P4

                                     Stage
                                     PCD
                                     Stage
                                     ETA
                                                             ,
                                                              m
                                                       elevation  (m, MSL)
                                                       of virtual  surface
                                                       in cell  (i,j),  hour
                                                                     m
                                                                    elevation  of  surface
                                                                    z,  in  pressure  (mb)
                                                                    coordinates.
                                                                   elevation of the
                                                                   virtual  surface z
                                                                   in pressure (mb)
                                                                   coordi nates

             indicator of
             presence of cold
             surface layer
                                     Stage
                                     DELRO
                                                       depth (m)  of  Layer
                                                       0 in cell  (i,j)  at
                                                       hour t
                                                                           .
zf(i,j)      smoothed terrain        Stage  SIG
             elevations (m, MSL)     ZT
z+.0',j)      5 min x 5 min averaged   RAW
             terrain elevation
             (m,  MSL) of cell  (i,j)
             elevation (m, MSL)      Stage
             of top surface of       H1HO
             Layer 1.
                                                      aT1(i,j,t  )    fraction  (0  -   cell  averaged east
                                                                    west  flow  speed
                                                                    component  (m/sec)
                                                                    at time  t   in the
                                                                    cold  layer1
                                        99

-------
                                  Table 7.1.  (Concluded)
 Input
Variable
               Description
                                               Output
                             Source   Stage    Variable
Description
cn(i,j,tm)   drag coefficient
Ap/p (i,j,t )buoyancy parameter
                                      Stage
                                      PCD
                                      Stage
                                      ETA
                                                               same as  ,
                                                               except nortn-sou
                                                               component
Ap,(t )
             cold layer growth        Stage
             rate                     ETA

             indicator of presence    Stage
             of cold surface layer    DELRO
u(i,j,t,,n) \  initial  values of
v(i,j,t™) )  h, u, and v
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
          )  time rate of  ,
         m   change (m sec"1)
             of cold layer
             depth at boundary
             point (iij1) at
             time t
m
                   m            -2
          )  acceleration (m sec  )
             of east-west flow
             component at boundary
             point (iij1) at time
             V
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
                                      Stage
                                      IBC
         m'
             same as URr except       Stage
             north-south flow         IBC
             component.
                                        100

-------
                           Appendix A to Section 7.

     Here  we  describe  a  numerical  procedure  for  deriving  solutions  of
differential equations of the form
          or*     sir*    5ii"*
          °L  + LpL + y°L + t>f =

where  all   coefficients  are  functions  of  time and  all  except K  and  b are
functions of  (x,y,t).   We  pointed out in Eq. 7-92 that the solution of (7-A1)
can be expressed in the form

                      Cx,t, I xiOrCxlOdx1
                          10      °                                (7-A2)

                        1
                        pCx.t-JxJt^SCxlt^dt'dx'
                       t
where
     p(x,t|x',t') =^?exp [-^^;  - ^ ^>  -)  b(t")dt"]      (7-A3)
                                                       t1
     x = x(t | x'.yit1) =  UCx'+xCt'^.y'+yCt'^.t'^dt"                     (7-A4)
                         t
     Y = y(t|xiy',t') =  rv(x'-Hx(t"),y'+y(t"),t")dt"                      (7-A5)
                         t1
                                    101

-------
and
          a2 = 2K(t-t').                                                 (7-A6)
In both  our flow model  and in  the regional model  we are  interested  in the
values of the dependent variable r only at the grid points
and only at the discrete time intervals t =nAt, n=l .....   Furthermore, in the
situations of  concern  to us the spatial  variations  in S are of  a scale much
larger  than U...wAt  or  V^/wAt  and  the  temporal  variations  are  generally
slower than the time step At.  Under these conditions we can express (7-A2) in
the approximate form
where
                  p(lAx,JAy,tn+1|x;tn)F(x;tn)dx'                        (7-A7)
                r(lAx,JAy,tn)                                           (7-A8)
and
          FQ$;tn) = F(xjtn) + S(xJtn)At.                                (7-A9)
Eq. 7-A7  expresses  the  value of f at grid point (I,J) at the future time t  -,
in terms  of  its known values at  the  present time t .  Since the kernel p has
the form (7-A3), we can evaluate (7-A7) analytically if we express F(x' ,t ) in
polynomial form (or in a Fourier series).
     To do  this  we note first that the kernel p in (7-A7) has a maximum value
at the point
          x' = x* = lAx-x 1                                             (7_A10)
                    JAy-y j
                                    102

-------
and it  decreases  to  zero  rather rapidly  away from this point.   In  fact,  if



K=0,  p   has  the  delta  function form  given  earlier  by  (7-93).   Thus,  the



polynomial that we  use  to  represent F  in  (7-A7)  should have maximum accuracy



in the  vicinity of  the  point x' =  (x*,y*),  which we can find  by  solving the



transcendental   equations  (7-A10).   In the  simple  case  where   the  spatial



variations in U and V are much larger than Ax and Ay and the temporal changes



in U  and V are  slow compared to At,  (7-A10) yields the approximate solutions



(cf 7-94)



          x* = IAX - U(lAx,JAy,tn+1)At 1                               (7.An)



          y* = JAy - V(lAx,JAy,tn+1)At j





The points (x*,y*) and (lAx.JAy) are illustrated in Figure 7-A1.







     Using  computer programming  notation  (to facilitate  comparisons  of the



theory presented here with the actual computer code), we define





          1ST = [IFIX(xVAx) + 0.5]Ax                                  (7-A12)



          JST = [IFIX(yVAy) + 0.5]Ay                                  (7-A13)





As  illustrated  in  Figure  7-A1,  (1ST, JST)  is the grid  cell  center closest to



(x*,y*)  (taking the  grid  points  (I,J) to  lie at  the corners of  each grid



cell).   In preparation   for  the expansion of  F(x' ,t )  in polynomial  form,  we
                                                i«v    p|
define the new coordinates
                                                                       (7'A14)
                                                                       C'-AIS)
Note that the origin of the (n.,4) system is the cell center  (1ST, JST).  We can
                                    103

-------
now express F(x',t ) by the biquintic (5th order)  Lagrange polynomial

          Ffx't ^ = 2J  z  TF
           C~J n;   XL j=i L ij
                              n   -
                              n
                      k=l
                                           1=1
                                                             (7-A16)
O O O O
O O O O,
0 0 •
/a o •
        o   o  o   o/ o  o
        o   o  o
        o   o  o
        o   o  o   o   o  o
                                                     / Back trajectory starting
                                                       from (I,J) at time t +-,,
                                                       going back in time
                                                       totn.
                                                       GRID POINT (I,J)

                                                        x*,y;(c)

                                                        IST.JST)
        Figure 7-A1.
           Illustration of the points used in the numerical
           solution of Eq. 7-A1.  Circled grid points are those
           from which values of F and S are taken to derive a
           biquintic expansion of F(x',t_) about the point
           (IST.JST) (see Eq. 7-A9).~   n
where
          a2 =

          a3 =

          a4 =

          a5 =

          a6 =
                                                             (7-A17)
-n  _
      F(iAx/2+IST,jAy/2+JST,tn)
                                                                       (7-A18)
                                    104

-------
and

          6 ,
          J[   ( )  = product over al1  k except k=i,
         k=l


          6 ,
          ]~[ "  ( )  = product over all  1 except l=j.
         1=1


Note that  (a.,b.),  1,j=l...6 are  the  coordinates  in (n,4) space  of  the grid

points  at which the  F..  are evaluated.   These are  the circled  grid  points

shown in Figure 7-A1.

     To simplify (7-A16) let


               6 ,
          X,- =F1  (n-ak)                                               (7-A19)
           1  k=l     *


               6 ,
          Y, =IT  (4-b,)                                               (7-A20)
           J  1=1     '


               6 ,
          L.. =H  (a,-a.)                                               (7-A21)
           1  k=l   n   K


               6 ,
          M. =f[  (b.-b,).                                             (7-A22)
           J  1=1   J   '


The  last  two  parameters  can  be  evaluated  directly  using (7-A17).   We  get
          Lj = MX = -3840

          L2 = M2 =   768

          L3 = M3 = - 384   {                                           (7-A23)

          L4 = M4 =   384

          [_5 = M5 = - 768

          L, = Mc =  3840
           b    b
                                    105

-------
Now (7-A16) can be written
                     6   6   n  X,Y
Now look at the expansion of X.:




          Xx = n5 - 5q4 - 10n3 + 50n2 + 9n - 45                         (7-A25)


          X2 = n5 - 3n4 - 26n,3 + 78n2 + 25n - 75                        (7-A26)
          •

          •

          •

          Xg = n5 + 5q4 - 10n3 - 50q2 + 9n + 45.                        (7-A27)



Thus, we can express the X. in the alternate form
          X. = Z  a. na                                                 (7-A28)
           1  a=0  la
where  the coefficients  a^   are  the  known values  given  in (7-A25  - A27).

Similarly
          Y. = 1  a.ft4P.                                                (7-A29)
           J  «=n  JP
Substituting (7-A28) and (7-A29) into (7-A24) and we obtain
                     5   5

          F(x'ftn)=I  Z A"na4P                                     (7-A30)
                n   a=0 p=0  afi
                                     106

-------
where
                6   6
           n             n a. a.
                             ...

     We now have the polynomial  expansion of F(x' ,t ) that we need to evaluate
(7-A7), but first we must change the integration variables in (7-A7)  from x1  to
(n,C).  We get
                         00
                        -00
                                 F(n,4,tn)dnd4
where
                              2a2
                                                                       (7-A34)
(see Eq.  7-A3); and b* = b(x*,y*,tn).
     Let
          e  = x* - 1ST                                                (7-A35)
           /\
          e  = y* - JST.                                               (7-A36)

Then,  representing x1  in (7-A33)  in terms  of  n we  obtain  (from 7-A14  and
7-A10)
          >x = -=~— exp C- -352*- ]                                 (7-A37)
                                    107

-------
where




          sx = ex/(Ax/2)                                               (7-A38)


          CT  = a/(Ax/2)                                                (7-A39)



An expression similar to (7-A37) describes A.
     Substituting (7-A30),  (7-A37)  and  the  analogous expression  for 6  into


(7-A32) we obtain





           n+1  ^  ^   n   _h*At
          FT, =2-  Z  A. e b At X v                                  (7-A40)
           10  	n n_n  UP         UP
where
                    oo
                 1     a       (n+ ^x )2
                            [- -s2- ] dp                            (7-A41)
                    oo
                     00
       1       8
V  =    -      P
                                  2cr
                    -00
These last two integrals can be evaluated analytically and we get
             = 1
                            304
                A     A


             =
                                                                       (7-A42)
                x                                                      (7-A43)

             =    +     2
                                    108

-------
Similar expressions give v ,  0=1,,..6, except £  is replaced by e .
     In summary, the  value of the dependent variable f  governed by (7-A1) is
obtained  at  time  level   n+1  at grid  point  (I,J) from  (7-A40) where  A"B is
derived from (7-A31)  using  known values of r at time level n; and where the \
and v parameters are given by (7-A43).
                                    109

-------
                            Appendix B to Section 7

     Here we  describe the  scheme  we have  developed to provide  the boundary
values that  the numerical  analogues  of the  differential  equations  (7-86)  -
(7-88) require  but which  the  differential  equations themselves  do  not need.

     The essence of our method is that we divide the u,  v,  and h fields into a
base state and  a perturbation component, and then  in  the  governing equations
we  set  all  sources of the  perturbation  fields  to zero outside the  region in
which  the prognostic equations  are  applied.    In  addition  we  assume  that
perturbations do not  exist outside inflow points of the modeling domain.  At
outflow points, we extrapolate interior values to estimate  u, v, and h outside
the  boundary,  but  these  estimates  are  only included  in the advection and
diffusion  terms of  the  equation  and  are  excluded  from  the  forcing terms.

     Rewriting the governing equations (7-86, 87, and 88) for future reference
and manipulation, we have
                                                                        (7-Bl)
                                                                        (7-B2)
                                    110

-------
                                                                        (7'B3)
where
          P  = 1 §E    p  = 1 §E    a'
          ^x   pQ3x  '  Fy   pQ3y '   g
Let
          u = u + u1                                                    (7-B5a)
          v = v + v1                                                    (7-B5b)
          h = h + h1                                                    (7-B5c)
where barred  variables refer  to  the base  state  and primed  variables  denote
fluctuations from  this  state.   Our aim is to absorb  the  effects  of the given
large scale forcing terms P  and P  as well  as initial and boundary conditions
                           x      y
in the base  state  variables (u, v, h), and  to  let (u' ,  v1,  h1)  represent the
perturbations from this state that arise as  a result of forcing by the terrain
z.  and  cooling  n.  within  the  simulated  domain.    Substituting  (7-B5a)  into
(7-B1) we get
                          *      * '•    + '•                             (7"B6)
                    -P  + fv + fV-  + KF^ + |!H +1!§'  +1^']
                      "              ^uavZ   3v^   &x.     3v
Now let u and v be solutions of
                       = -Pv + fv                                      (7-B7a)
                           x
                                    111

-------
                      = -P  - fu.                                     (7-B7b)
          h               y
and assume
          8u _ 9v  ~  n  ~  J"a2u  . a2u~|                                    (7-B8)
          at ~ at  "  u  "  "
Subtract (7-B7a)  from  (7-B6) and use (7-B8):
                                   -v'-f)                         (7-B9)


                                 a2u'
From (7-B2) and (7-B5b)  we  have
               §*'*=£
                                 . a2v'
                                 T    i)  I
                                     Z  J
                                    112
                                                                      (7-B10)

-------
Using (7-B7b) and (7-B8) we can reduce (7-B10) to
                    -g.fh' - u.(fv+f)
                     y 8y      V3x    '
Now combine (7-B5c) and (7-B3):
                                                                        ,-, D10x

                                                                        (7"B12)
where
          _   ,  r
                                                                        (7-B13)
and A is the model domain.  We define
                                                                        (7-B14)
                                    113

-------
Subtracting this equation from (7-B12) we have
where we have assumed
 *     ' 0.
                                                                       (7-B16)
Now we write the basic equations (7-B9), (7-B11) and (7-B15) in the following forms:
                                                                       (7-B17)
                          = + S
                                                                       (7-818)
where
 = 3u/8x



 = 8v/8y



= 8u/8x + 3v/8y
                                                                       (7-B19)
                                                                       (7-B20)



                                                                       (7-B21)



                                                                       (7-B22)
                                    114

-------
                    C
                    C2
                                    "       i
                                  - r(u2+v2)'5])  if u1  t 0;
                              ,  otherwise
                                                                       (7-B23)
                                             ] ,  if v1  t 0;
                    -(u2+v2P ,  otherwise.
                   8x    8y
                                                                       (7-B24)
                                                                       (7-B25)
          s
                                                             (7-B26)
                                                                       (7-B27)
sh =
                                       9v
                           8y
                                                                       (7-B28)
                                                                       (7-B29)
                                                                       (7-B30)
                                                                       (7-B31)
and h satisfies (7-B14); u and v satisfy (7-B7a, B7b) and (7-B8); and u, v and

h are defined by (7-B5).

                                    115

-------
     We require only first-order derivatives in evaluation of the p's and S's.



We use the notation
x=!Ax
y=JAy
A r „ \ - 9g
V9l-j) ' 7y
x=lAx
/=JAy
We define several  different  A  and A  operators, each  of different orders of
                              x      y


accuracy.
                                                                       (7-B33)
= (9
                       I+lfJ
                                                                       (7-B34)
                         + ^I,J+3 ' fli,j-3)]/(606y)
                                                                       (7-B35)
                    = C8(fl
                          I,J+l
                                                                       (7-B37)
where 6  and 6  are the grid mesh dimensions.
       x      y
     The  following  operators  are  used  to  compute  first  derivatives  on



boundaries:
                                    116

-------
                                              1059i+2,J '  1609l+3,J
                                                              )         (7-B38)
                                                        " 16°9l,J+3
          EAx(gI}J) =
                                                              )        (7-B40)
               ^j) = [171fllfJ -                  j            >
                         •659l,J-4 + 99l,J-5 - 9l,J-6^120V         (7"B41)
The operators defined  above  are used to compute the  variables  jj ,  Pv,  ...  S'
defined  by Eqs.  (7-B20)  - (7-B31)  in  the sequence  illustrated by the  flow
chart in  Figure  7B-1.   Following are descriptions  of the operations indicated
in the flow chart.
     Although the model  domain  is a grid of 60 x 42 cells, we use an array of
66 x  48 cells in solving the governing  equations (7B-1, 2 and  3)  in FLOMOD.
The extra  cells  comprise a "frame" 3  cells  wide around the 60  x  42 modeling
domain.  Values  of all  parameters  within this  frame of  cells  are specified
whereas those  within the modeling  domain are  predicted using  the governing
equations.    Specification  of the BAR  variables  Pu,  J3V,  Ph,  $u, S"v and  $h
within the frame is straightforward since the variables u, v,  h, etc. on  which
they depend are given at all points in the 66 x 48 cell region.   Specification
of the  PRIME variables  p^,  p^,  p^, S^,  S^,  and S^ within the frame region is
guided  by  the desire  to avoid the  spurious generation  of disturbances just
outside the  modeling  region that  can subsequently enter the area of interest.
                                    117

-------
The prime  variables u1,  v1,  and h1  represent perturbations  from  the "base"
state  represented  by (u, v,  h).  We assume that all  sources  of perturbation
energy, such  as terrain  z.t  cooling n'»  etc.  are within  the  60  x  42 model
region.  Therefore, we  assign zero  value to all prime variables outside this
region, namely  in  the  boundary  frame  area.   This  is a  key  feature  of our
boundary scheme.   Finally,  specification  of u1, v1, and h1  in the frame zone
must be done  arbitrarily.   The prognostic equations (7-B1,  B2,  B3) cannot be
applied  in  the  frame  region  because  that  would   require  values  of  all
parameters  outside the 66  x 48  domain.   A common method of estimating the
values of  the dependent variables outside the modeling area is to extrapolate
values  from the interior  of the simulation area.   We  have found  that even
crude  extrapolation techniques  give acceptable  results  when   used  with the
advection-diffusion  equation.   But  the  same methods  generally  fail  when
utilized with systems of equations like (7-B1, etc.) because the errors in the
extrapolated  values outside  the  simulation region give rise  to disturbances
that spoil the accuracy of the solutions obtained within the model region.  We
attempt to alleviate this problem by setting all source terms that involve the
dependent  variables equal  to zero  outside  the  model  domain  (the  60  x 42
region) but we  extrapolate  values of these variables  for use in the advection
and diffusion terms of  the equation.   In particular,  if a given point on the
edge of the 60 x 42 region is a point of inflow, then we assume  u' = v1 = h1 =
0  at   all  3 cells  of  the frame  zone adjacent to  this point.   For example,

           u'(l,J) = u'(2,J) = u'(3,J) = 01
           v'U.J) = v'(2,J) = v'(3,J) = 0   if  [u(4,J) f u'(4,J)]> 0
           h'(l,J) = h'(2,J) = h'(3,J) = OJ

At  points  of  outflow,  we use the following extrapolation, illustrated for the
case of point (4,J):
                                    118

-------
   READ FIXED
     FIELDS
    INITIALIZE
    u'=v'=h'=0
 	READ
 u. v, h, CD. g'. n. n'
    COMPUTE
 BAR VARIABLES
(0
c
o
+•«
CO
O
O

O
    COMPUTE
PRIME VARIABLES
   /8'u. P'v. (8'h,
   S'u. S'v. S'h.
  CALL SOLVER
 COMPUTE NEW
     u',v", h'
                N
                                                   CD
                                                   SI
                                                   U
                                                   1
                                                   u.
00
r-
£
O3
         119

-------
     u'(l.J) = u'(2,J) = u'(3,J)
     v'(l,J) = v'(2,J) = v'(3,J)
     h'(l,J) = h'(2,J) = h'(3,J)
                                  if [u(4,J) + u'(4,J)]< 0
where
= - 2u'(5,J)
                                      (5/2)u'(4,J)
etc.
Calculation of the BAR variables.
     Figure 7B-2 shows the grid on which the BAR variables J3 , S  , etc. are to
be  evaluated and  the  derivative operators  that are  to  be employed  at each
point.
     From (7-B20) - (7-B22)
          Pud,J)=Ax(uI>J)
          Ph(I,J) = Pu
                                                               (7-B42)

                                                               (7-B43)

                                                               (7-B44)
and from (7-B26) - (7-B28)
                                    120

-------
                                                                       (7-B45)
                                                                       (7-B46)
                      "I,JLVUI,J'   V I,JJJ   'I,J                 (7-B47)
In  evaluating  the six  expressions  above,  the  operators  A  and A  should  be
                                                           x      y
selected as follows (see Fig.  7B-2):

                         A   •  if I=1«
                         EAx   ,  if 1=66;
                         2AX   ,  if 1=2 or  1=65;                       (7-B48)
                         4AX   ,  if 1=3 or  1=64;
                         6AV   ,  if 1=4-63.
                         NAy   ,  if J=48;
                         2A    ,  if J=2 or J=47
                         4A    ,  if J=3 or J=46
                         6A,   ,  if J=4-45
where 2AY, 2A ,  etc.  are defined by (7-B32) - (7-B41).
        x    y
(7-B49)
                                    121

-------
  :rrrcz:::::.:
  46
  45
  J


f


1 1
1
1
1 I 	


6-

5.
i

ll
2^

f
'




j i
•^ —
\x .
! :•: :•:•
\ l;:i
> • «<• •;
| is:
1 f<: •
' * "::'•

. . I
\ \ t


^;

?













^;

;!|i


























. .c/\







2
                                           ,-.-'J
                                           6^y
 1 = 1
                                          i.  >
                            - •™p*^.(7f.f!VTf^*'?!'!**.T**T.T'*"~
                               :':-x:::•:•:• ':•:x:: ::::.i
                                      >;:i
                                       i
                              fe& u ilitfu'-.'^'fe'-l ™*.A»—
i




\ \ \

1
                             60  61  62  63  64  65  66
        Figure 7B-2.
Grid network on which pu, py,  ph, §u, Sy,  and §h
are computed.  Different spatial derivative operators
AX and A  are required in these calculations as indicated.
Calculation of the  PRIME variables
     The  PRIME  variables p^,  p^,...S^  are  defined  on the same 66 x 48 grid
system as the BAR variables but the calculation procedure is different.  As we
noted earlier  all  PRIME  variables are set to zero  outside the 60 x 42 cell
simulation area. Thus, we assume                                       <
                                 122

-------
     p^(I,J) = P^CI.J) = P/,(I,J) = S^(I,J) = S^(I,J) = S^(I,J) = 0,     (7-B50)





          if I = 1,2,3,64,65, or 66; or J=l,2,3,46,47, or 48.





At all other grid points, namely 1=4-63, J=4-45 compute the  PRIME  variables  as



follows:





                         0   , if u'Ij0 = 0;



                                                                        (7-B51)




                         C2     u                 i   u


                         UT  i   nT  -i   *,J    1 ,J     r       1 ,J     1»*J
                          I,J    I,J                   I J






                                             if ui  , ± 0
where
where
          UI,J = UI,J + UI,J  '




                         0,   if



          p;d,J) =  J                                                   (7-B52)
                               [     (uf j + vf  ,   -       (uf  ,  +  vf
                          i     h      i,J     i , J      -       i,J     1,0

                         VI,J   hI,J                   hI?j
                                                                        (7-B53)





                                                                        (7-B54)
                                    123

-------
          sh(I>J)  = ui,A + vi,jV"hi,J) + Ri,jPh(I'J)          (7'B56)
In equations  (7-B53,. . ,7-B56)  the derivative operators A  and A   should be
selected  as follows when  they  operate on PRIME variables:
                         EAX    if  1=63;
          Ax(4JsJ)  =<    2AX    if  1=5 or  1=62;                         (7-B57)
                         4AX    if  1=6 or  1=61;
                     ( _ 6AX    if  1=7-60.
                         NAy    if J=
                    /  "  2Ay    if J=5 or J=44;                         (7-B58)
                         4A    if J=6 or J=43;
                               if J=7-42.
In  Eqs.  (7-B53,.. ,7-B56) use  6AX and  6A   in  a11  applications  to  the BAR
variables  u,  v,  and h.   In this  regard it  should be  repeated  that  Eqs.
(7-B51,..,7-B56) are applied  only  to columns  1=4-63 and to rows J=4-45, and at
these points  the  6-th order operators  can be applied  to  BAR variables  (see
7-B48 and  7-B49).   At all other  points the PRIME variables  are  set to  zero
(see 7-B50).


Calculation of the dependent  variables u',  v;. and  h'.
     The three  dependent variables  are computed at  each time step using the
prognostic equations (7-B17,.. ,7-B19)  within the 60  x 42 cell' modeling region
bounded by columns  1=4  and 63 and by rows  J=4 and  45.  These  calculations are
done in the following steps.
                                   124

-------
     First we define the function

          A(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,£6x6,K)                          (7-B59)

which represents the biquintic algorithm described in Appendix 7A that is used
to solve the differential equations numerically.  In Eq. (7-B59), 1ST and JST are
given functions  of I,J,u'  and v1  (see  7-A12,  A13);  £gxc  is an  array  of 36
variables  at  grid points  surrounding (1ST,JST) which  we specify  below (see
also Fig. 7-A1); and K is the diffusivity.   The function SOLVER can be used to
predict  the next  values of  u1,  v1,  and  h1  at  each  of the  60 x  42  points
defined above.   Consider each of the 3 variables in turn.
     1.   u'(I,J,N+l) in 60 x 42 model domain.
               Step 1.
                         B*(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,46x6,0)
                              where
                                   ^6x6 = PU + Pu
               Step 2.
                         C*(I,J) = SOLVER(I,J,IST,JST,46x6,K)
                              where
                                        = u'(N) +
               Step 3.
                                = C*(I,J)*exp(-B*(I,J))
     2.   v'(!,J,N+l) in 60 x 42 model domain.
          Same steps as in u1 calculation except replace Pu, p^, u'(N), §u and
          Su by PV' Pv' V'(N)> ^v and Sv'
                                    125

-------
     3.    h'(I,J,N+l) in 60 x 42 model  domain.
          Same steps as  u1,  except  replace pu, 3^,  u'(N),  §u, and S^  by  ph,
          P^'  n'(N)» $n  and S^, respectively.   Replace K by  K^.   In  order to
          avoid the  problems that  zero or  negative fluid depth  predictions
          would cause, perform  the  following operation after  each  time step:

               IF((h'(N+l) + h(N+l)).LT.1.0) h1  (N+l) = 1.0-h(N+l)

     As we  noted  earlier,  values of  the dependent variables  in the  boundary
frame region are  assigned zero  values at all  inflow points  and are predicted
by simple extrapolation of the interior values  at  points of  outflow.  Consider
first the western  boundary zone.

     4.    u'(N+l), v'(N+l) and h'(N+l) in western  boundary zone 1=1-3, J=4-45.
          If (u(4,J,N) + u'(4,J,N))  >  0, then
                  u'(l,J,N+l) = ul(2,0,N+l) = u'(3,J,N+l)  =  0

          Same holds for v1 and h1.

          If (u(4,J,N) + u'(4,J,N))  <0), then
                  u'(l,J,N+l) = u'(2,J,N+l) = u'(3,J,N+l)
                    = -2u'(5,J,N) +  (l/2)u'(6,J,N) + (5/2)u'(4,J,N)
          Similar expressions are used for v1 and h1.

     5.    u'(N+l), v'(N+l) and h'(N+l) in the eastern boundary zone 1=64-66,
          J = 4-45.
          If (u(63,J,N) +  u'(63,J,N))  < 0, then

               u'(64,J,N+l) = u'(65,J,N+l) = u'(66,J,N+l) = 0
                                    126

-------
     Same holds for v1  and h1.





     If (u(63,J,N) + u'(63,J,N)) < 0, then





          u'(66,J,N+l)  = u'(65,J,N+l) = u'(64,J,N+l)





               = (l/2)u'(61,J,N) - 2u'(62,J,N) + (5/2)u'(63,J,N)





     Similar expressions hold for v1 and h'.





6.    u'(N+l), v'(N+l) and h'(N+l) in the southern zone 1=4-63, J=l-3.



     If(v(I,4,N) + v'(I,4,N))> 0, then
          u'(I,l,N+l) = u'(I,2,N+l) = u'(I,3,N+l) = 0.





     Same holds for v1 and h1.





     If (v(I,4,N) + v'(I,4,N))  < 0, then
               -2u'(I,5,N)





     Similar expressions hold for v1 and h1.





7.   u'(N+l), v'(N+l) and h'(N+l) in the northern boundary zone



          I = 4-63, J = 46-48.





     If (v(I,45,N) + v'(I,45,N)) < 0, then





          u'(I,46,N+l) = u'(I,47,N+l) = u'(I,48,N+l) = 0





     Same holds for v1 and h1.
                               127

-------
          If (v(I,45,N) + v'(I,45,N)) > 0,  then
                          '(I,43,N) - 2u'(I,44,N) + (5/2)u'(I,45,N)
          Similar expressions hold for v1  and h1.
     The specifications  of u1, v1  and h1  given in steps 4-7  above  give the
dependent variables at time  step  N+l at all  boundary  zone areas except the 4
corner zones.   The southwest  corner zone is illustrated  in  Figure 7B-3.  In
each  of  the  four corner  zones  we  will  assign  the dependent  variables the
average of the  values  computed on the edges of these zones, as illustrated in
the  Figure.   For example, referring  to  Figure 7B-3 and  keeping  in mind that
          u'(4,l,N) = u'(4,2,N) = u'(4,3,N),
and similarly for v1  and h1 ;  and that

          u'(l,4,N) = u'(2,4,N) = u'(3,4,N),
and similary for v1 and h', we assume in the southwest corner zone that
          u'(I,JtN+l) = l/2[u'(4,l,N+l) + u'(l,4,N-KL)]
                                         1=1,2,3 and J=l,2,3.
and similarly for v1 and h'.  We use a similar method to compute the dependent
variables in the northwest, northeast, and southeast corner zones.
                                    128

-------
                 1
         !•
           i
           f

         6*
           i
           I

         5|

           i

"WEST*
BOUNDARY
• 1 •
ZONE
'I'
.*.
lllltiilillP^
||;CpRiN!ER^|
io'ftBinDniiUTci
t: • :•-:•: i'xx^x-x-x'x-x::- .
I: : •••,:': ::^^x.::x:;xv:'x:x:::x:.Vx-:
j. x : •.•: ' :•: :•:-.•:•: :•:-.-. •••:•:•••:•:•:•:•:•:•:•:• •.•'

i;: xAMobEL ooMAiN ^•••^

1
1
I-* 	 SOUTH BOUNDARY Z(
i
1
i
       J = 1

        1=1    234
Figure 7B-3.   Illustration of the southwest corner zone and the
              west and south boundary zones of the model domain.
                            129

-------
SYYYYYYYYYYYY
                                 
        V V V V V V V
                130

-------
                                   SECTION 7
                                 PROCESSOR P8

INTRODUCTION
     This processor determines the top surfaces H2 and HS of layers 2 and 3 of
the regional  model,  it  computes  mean vertical velocities  on  these surfaces,
and it estimates convective cloud updraft speeds and other parameters required
in the  specification of pollutant  fluxes  across  surfaces H2 and  HS.   All  of
these quantities play important roles in the regional model, but unfortunately
none of  them  is  directly measurable.  In this  section  we outline a procedure
for deriving  estimates  of these  parameters  that  are  consistent  both  with
observational  data and physical principles.

DERIVATION OF BASIC EQUATIONS

     Recall from Part 1 that
          H2(x,y,z,t) = Z2(x,y,t) - z                                    (8-1)
where z2  is nominally  the elevation of  the top of  the  mixed  layer.   During
clear daylight hours,  z2 is the highest  elevation  that nonbuoyant pollutants
can reach.  When convective clouds are present, we take z2 to be the elevation
of cloud  b?ses,  specifically,  the so-called lifting condensation level (LCL).
In this  case pollutants  entering the  updrafts  that feed  individual  cumulus
clouds can  rise  above elevation z2 and proceed as far as the elevation of the
cloud tops,  which we  define to  be  the elevation  zs of the top  of Layer 3.
                                    131

-------
When convective clouds  are  absent,  z3 is defined  to  be z2 + h3, where  h3 is
some constant depth  of  order 100 meters.   Figure 8-1 illustrates the surfaces
H2 and H3  in  a  regional domain  in  the  typical  condition where cumulus clouds
are present over only a portion of the modeling region.

     We  showed  in  Part  1, Eq.  (4-20)  that  z2  satisfies the  differential
equation
                                                                         (8-2)
Here w   is the entrainment velocity  (represented  in Part 1 by  f6/A6);  w2 is
the  cell  averaged vertical air speed at  elevation z2; w   is  the effective,
cell averaged cumulus updraft velocity at cloud base (i.e.,  at z2); V2u is the
horizontal  wind  velocity at  elevation  z2;  and  QC is  the fractional  area
covered by convective (cumulus) clouds.   The last parameter is measurable from
  Figure 8-1.  Illustration of surfaces H2 and H3 during situations in which
               convective clouds cover only a portion of the modeling region.
                                    132

-------
satellite  photographs  and  it  is  the  only variable  in (8-2)  that can  be
estimated  reliably.   We  will  assume  that  ac(x,y,t)  is  an  input to  this
processor.

     All  the other variables  in  (8-2) must be inferred through comparisons of
this equation with certain measured data and other physical principles.   This
is the task we undertake  in this  section.

     An  auxiliary  relationship  that  will  aid in the  estimation  of  w  is the
water  vapor mass  conservation  equation.   Using  Eq.  2-29 of  Part  1 we can
express the layer averaged water  vapor mixing ratio q  in  the form

           a             31 nV.               .
          ^ j + j  -inr1 +  vV^j + V FMJ '  FJ,J] = °      (8"3)
                                              j
where  .  is the  cell  averaged  mixing  ratio in layer j, A is the horizontal
         J
area of  a  cell,  V. is  the volume of a cell  lying  in  layer j and  F. ,, is the
                  J                                                J > *
flux of material  across surface  H.  to or from layer k.  To arrive at  (8-3), we
                                 J
dropped  the horizontal  flux  terms  in  (2-29)  of  Part  1 that  represent the
effects  of  subgrid scale  variations  in the  horizontal wind v.u.  Our interest
                                                           ~jn
is  in  3  during  periods when  cumulus clouds are present (i.e., 0  2 0).  If
we  assume  that the advection  term  in (8-3)  is negligible in these conditions
compared to the  other  terms,  we  obtain with  the aid of Eqs. (4-3) and (4-21b)
of Part I
             3 +       i3-i2] + _!_ [CT (i^±£
              H 3   z3-z2  3  2    z3-z2 L  cv  l-ac
                    we)(qc-3) +

                    -3Zs] = 0
                                    133

-------
where     z2 = 3z2/8t, Z3 = 8z3/3t and
          H3 = z3 + vs'Yz3 - w3.                                         (8-5)
Also, qc  represents the mixing ratio  in  cumulus clouds and q^  is  the mixing
ratio just  above the  elevation  of cloud  tops,  i.e.,  just  above  z3.   If we
assume  that the  horizontal  advection  term  in  (8-5)  is negligible,  we can
reduce (8-4) to
          at 3 + zz  Cac       + we)(qc-3)
                                                                          (8-6)
and after multiplying by (z3-z2) and rearranging terms we obtain

                          [w2 * (l-ac)we][3 + Js!J£j
                                                    c                     (8-7)
                          + w3(qoo - 3)
where
          M3(x,t) =    q(x,zft)dz                                         (8-8)
                      z2(x,t)

and
                  -?                                                      (8-9)
     At each of the sites x  of rawin  stations we have available measurements
                          ~ro
of  q(z),  v2u(z) and  6(z) at  each  observation time.   We also  know a  and z3
(where a   ^ 0) everywhere from satellite data.  Using all this information we
can  derive estimates of  all  the parameters  in (8-7)  except WG  and wg, and
                                    134

-------
thereby  we  can  derive a  relationship that  w  and w   must satisfy  at each
rawin  site x .   This relationship can subsequently be employed in conjunction
with  (8-2)  to  obtain estimates  of  z2,  w   and w   throughout  the modeling
domain.
     In order to use the rawin  data and Eq. 8-7 in this way, it is convenient
to  integrate (8-7)  between  each  set  of measurement  times.   Let t0  and ^
denote two  successive  times when rawin  observations  are  gathered at a given
station.   Ordinarily,  tt  and t0 will be 12 hours apart, but shorter intervals
are possible.  Integrating (8-7) we get
             Cp~ wc - we(l-oc)3 - weqcoc]dt = M3(ti) - M3(t0)
          to
                                                                         (8-10)
                     x            q a
                       [w2(3 + i~ ) - Va + w3(qoo-3)]dt
where all  variables  are evaluated at a  given  rawin  site x .   We assume that
                                                           /V|||
only w  and w  are unknowns in this equation.  For all other parameters we can
use the following expressions.

     First, we adopt the approximation

          qc ~ q(z2).                                                   (8-11)
Then
          qc(t) ~ q(z2,t0) + qc(t-t0)                                   (8-12)
                                    135

-------
where
and
          qc = Cq(z2,ti) - q(z2,to)](t1-t0)"1                            (8-13)
          q(z2,t0) = q(xnj>z=z2(to))to).
Next, we approximate z2 and z3 by
          z2(tn) = FCqCx^z.t^, e(xm,z,tn))     n=0,l                  (8-14)
where F is a function that is defined later; and
                   fz2(t ) + 100 meters, if a (x  t )=0;
          z3(tj =                            c  m  n   n=0,l           (8-15)
                   (_ from satellite data,   otherwise

          z3(t) = [zs(ti) - Z3(t0)] (ti-to)"1.                           (8-16)
     Since (8-4)  bears  the implicit assumption that fls >  0, which we adopted
in  anticipation  of application  to  situations  where  convective clouds  are
present  and  growing, we must  ensure  that the  value  of  z3 given  by  (8-16)
satisfies
          z3 > 0.                                                       (8-17)
This  constraint  is  most  likely  to be  violated  when   a  =   0  either  at
observation time to or at ti, but not both.
     In this instance we can adjust the estimate of z2 at the hour that QC = 0
to achieve z3 > 0.  Adjusting z2 is consistent with the position adopted later
that  only a  range  of  z2 values  can be  estimated  with confidence  from  the
measured data at any rawin site and time.
                                    136

-------
     We approximate the temporal variations in qw by
                                                                        (8-18)
and from this  we  assume in analogy with the form we adopted for q  , i.e., Eq.
8-12,
          qjt) = q(z3,t0) + qoo(t-t0)                                  (8-19a)
where
          cia, = CqUs.ti) - q(z3,t0)] (tx-to)" .                         (8-19b)
From (8-8) we get
          M3(xm,t1) =  1  q(xm,z,t1)d2                                   (8-20)
and
                       Z3(xm,t0)
                         q(xn),z,t0)dz                                   (8-21)
Similarly,
          3 = 3 + 3(t-t0)                               (8-22)
where
          3 = [3 - 33/(ti-t0)                          (8-23)

and
     The  vertical  air  speeds  w2  and  w3  that  enter  into  (8-10)  will  be
approximated by
                                    137

-------
          *2(xm,t) = w(xB,z2(t),t)  ,  to < t < ti;                       (8-25)
          ws(xm,t) = w(xm,z3(t),t)   ,  to < t < ti;                      (8-26)
where w(x,z,t) is  the  vertical  air speed at  site x,  elevation z(MSL) at hour
t.  There are  various methods  of determining w  from  the  set of rawin data but
we will not consider any of them here.   We will simply assume that some means
of estimating  w  exists  and  we will  leave it  to  the model user  to  choose a
feasible scheme.    [In  implementating  the present regional model,  we  used the
method developed by Bullock  (1983)].   The elevations Za(t) and z3(t) at which
w(t) is evaluated in (8-25) and (8-26) are taken to  be
          z2(t) = Z2(xm,t0) + Z2(t-t0)     t0 < t < ti                  (8-27)
where
          Z2 = [Z2(xm,ti) -Z2(xm,to)]/(ti-t0);

          z3(t) = Z3(xra>t0) + Z3(t-t0)                                  (8-28)
with z3 given by (8-16).
     Now  that we  have  formulated  approximate  expressions  for  each of  the
parameters  in (8-10)  except WG and  we,  we  can define a  constant wc  which
satisfies
              ti
                T^T dt =  \  ^^3 + dr(qc-s)]wpdt
                J. U_       J           I.  v.        c
              to            to
                      A(xm; to.
                                                                        (8-29)
                                    138

-------
where WG = wc(xm; t0sti) and
                                           r'1
                               - M3(t0) +    [w2(3                   (8-30)
                                            to
                                W3(qco-3)]dt.
The parameter w   is the effective cumulus cloud updraft speed w  character!' s-
                L*                                               C*
tic of  the  air  mass in the  vicinity  of the rawin site xm during the interval
to <  t  < ti between observations.  In  other words, in the  vicinity of x  we
assume
          wc(x>t) = w^; to.ti)       to < t < ti, and
                                        i      i                          (8~31)
                                         x-xm  < 6
                                        I ~ ~m I
where  wc  satisfies  (8-29).   Note  that  (8-29)  relates  w   to  the unknown
entrainment speed w , which we consider next.
     Continuing  our  examination of  the  region around x  ,  let  us  look at the
air  parcel  trajectory  that  ends  at xm  at time  ti.   Figure  8-2  depicts it
beginning from its position at time to.   Writing Eq. (8-2)  in the form
          dz     w        a
and  integrating  it from to to ti along the trajectory ending at xm at time
we get
                                    139

-------
                                        dt e,ti), or more precisely a  range  of values in which we expect z2 to
lie,  from (8-14).   But x'  is  generally  not  the location  of  meteorological
measurements so z2(x(J),to) can only be estimated from interpolation procedures.
Let us suppose that through a combination of measurements and interpolation we
are able to say with confidence that
                                                                        (8-34)
          Z2(xffl,ti) - z2(x^,t0) = Az2(xm;t1,t0) ±
               6z2(xm;ti,t0)
where Az2  and  6z2 are known, partly  from  (8-14).   We can now write  (8-33)  in
the form
                      ti            tj          ti
                      r  w       .  r   o-        c
          Az2 ± 6z2 =(t) J-g-dt - w (D TT£- dt +(K w dt.                  (8-35)
                      J   uc       J     c     T
                       to            to          to
The cloud  cover  fraction a (x,t) is known everywhere  and we assume that w2  is
                           C* ***
also  available  at  all   points  and  hours.   Thus,  (8-35)  contains  only  2
unknowns:  WG and wg.
                                    140

-------
            Figure 8-2.  Illustration of the air parcel trajectory
                         that arrives at point x  at hour ti.  Point
                         x' denotes the parcel's location at time
                         ?m <- t
                         to < ti.
     Following  a  number  of  previous  investigators  (see,  for  example,  the
review by Artoz  and Andre, 1980) we shall assume that the kinematic heat flux
at z2 is proportional to that at the ground, namely
                 =   = aQ
                                                              (8-36)
where  Q is  the known  surface  heat flux  and a  is  a constant.   Recall  that
we =
                  A8
                                                                        (8-37)
where A8  is  the effective jump  in  potential  temperature across the elevation
Z2-   By  comparing simple mixed-layer growth  rate  formulas with measurements,
                                    141

-------
Artoz and Andre  (1980)  found that a simple, reasonably accurate expression is
                                                                        (8.38)
where Y = d6/dz evaluated at z=Z2+£ and h=Z2-zf, where zt is the local terrain
                                              \f         U


elevation.  Eq.  (8-38)  suggests  that within the vicinity  of  rawin station x



we can approximate w  by
          wp(x,t) = G(xm;t0,t1)Q(x,t)   , t0 < t < ti;                  (8-39)
                                          x-xm   < 6
                                          ~ ~m
where G  is an  unknown  function that  we suspect from (8-38)  is  of the order
          G(xm;t0jt1)"1 ~ [3! e(xm,z=z2+e,T)][z2(xm,T) -
                                                                        (8-40)
where t is some instant in the interval to to
     Substituting (8-39) into (8-35) we obtain
                         W            10          L


          AZ2 ± 6Z2 =Ci)^- dt " ^r Q-FF- dt + G(P
                           c         J    c        J

                       t(j             to            to





where  the  integrals are  all  along the trajectory  shown  in  Fig.  8-2.  Making



use  of   (8-39)  in  (8-29) and  substituting  the   result  into (8-41) we get
                                    142

-------
                  tl                tt

     Az2 ± 6z2 = G> ^- dt - i- [G j [3 + ac(qc-3)]

                  to                t0
                                                                        (8-42)
               Q(xm,t)dt + A] + G© Qdt
                 ~m               '

                                  Jt0

where
          5  = kll£	.                                                (8-43)
                 qcac
                      dt
                 Fa  dt
               to   °


We repeat that in our notation^ £dt denotes integration of £ evaluated at the
                     & 11        i
                     f" " i.        *• o
fixed point x  while© ?dt denotes integration of t(£,t) along the space-time
                     » tg

coordinates illustrated in Figure 8-2.


     In expression  (8-42),  G  is  the only  unknown  parameter.   For each number

AZ2 in the interval indicated on the left-hand side of (8-42), i.e.,
          Az2 - 622 < AZ2 < AZ2 + 6z2                                   (8-44)

there corresponds a G given by
              [AZ2 -0- dt +  A]{(1> Qdt -  -   [3
                        ^
' 4-    ^*       *C   * 4-        ^*
to                ^0
                                                   (8-45)

    Q(xm.t)dt}-1
                                    143

-------
Let us assume  that  the set of G associated through (8-45)  with  the set of AZ2
defined by (8-44) lies on the interval

          Gmin < G i G«x                                               <8-46>
Only positive  values  of  G are physically meaningful  because  both w  and Q are
positive during  convective  conditions.   Therefore,  if the  interval1 defined by
(8-46) contains only negative values,  one or more of the parameters entered in
(8-45)  have  erroneous  values.   When  this situation  arises  in  practice,  we
propose to alter the values of the various terms in (8-45)  until the resulting
G interval at  least contains positive values.   At the  most  we  would want the
largest positive values of G to be consistent with (8-40).   Alterations of the
parameters in  (8-45) should  proceed  according to  a fixed rule  in  which the
parameter  suspected  of   being  the  most  inaccurate  is  altered  first,  and
succeeding terms  in the  hierarchy are modified only  after  adjustments to the
least  accurate terms  have  failed to  produce  the desired  values of  G.   The
alterations made  in the  value of any  one  parameter  should be confined to the
smallest interval  in  which  one could reasonably assume that the correct value
lies.    Regarding  the order in  which  the parameters  in  (8-45)  should  be
altered, we propose the following hierarchy based solely on intuition:

          qc,  qc, 3, Q, w2, AZ2, CTC.                                 (8-47)
     Suppose that  through a process like that  described above we have managed
to  extract  from  (8-45)  ah  interval  of G  that  contains  some  positive values.
Our  interest  is  only  in the positive  values,  i.e.,  the  G in  the interval

                      i G i Gmax                                        (8'48)
                                    144

-------
     To each  G in this  interval  there  corresponds a WG through relationship
(8-29), namely
                                               gc (qc "
                                                                        (8-49)
                         Q(xm,t)dt}
Let the interval defined by (8-48) and (8-49) be represented by
          A                A
          w  - 6w  < w  <  w + 6w  .                                     (8-50)

Like G,  WG  is  intrinsically  a positive quantity.  Therefore,  if  (8-50)  does
not  lie  at   least  partially  on the  positive,  real  axis,  we must  perform
alterations on  parameter  values  in  (8-49) until  the  interval  (8-50)  contains
some positive values.   The procedure should be similar to that used to obtain
positive  G values,  except in  the  case  of  w   we  should alter  only  those
                                                I*
parameters in (8-49)  that do  not appear  in  the expression for G.   Otherwise,
we would cause changes in the G values as well.  Thus, the suggested hierarchy
of  parameters  that should  be  modified,  if necessary, to  achieve  positive  w
values is the following:

          q^, M3, w3, Z3.                                               (8-51)
     At the conclusion of this operation we obtain a positive set of w  values
and a  positive  set of G values, both of which apply only to the time interval
to  < t < ti  and within  the vicinity of rawin station m.  The next step is to
apply  the same procedures  to  the rawin  observations made  at  station m+1 at
hours  to  and ti to obtain  the  corresponding sets of WG and G values for that
                                    145

-------
site.   Once values  have  been obtained for all  rawin stations for the interval
to < t  <  ti,  we can interpolate values for w  and G at all  grid points in the
model  domain.   With  these  fields  and the known wind fields  v2u(x,t), w2(x,t),
and the cloud  cover distribution a , we  can solve (8-2) for z2  at  each grid
point and each  hour t in the interval  t0 < t  < ti.   By repeating the entire
process for the  next observation  interval ti < t  < t2, we  can  obtain z2 and
all the other necessary fields during this period.

     Before outlining  the  specific  sequence  of steps  necessary to  implement
the procedure  described  above,  let  us comment briefly on  the  philosophy of
this approach.   Many prognostic models have been developed in recent years for
predicting the  mixed-layer depth z2  given the surface  heat flux  Q,  the mean
vertical velocity w2 and other physical quantities.  These models are not well
suited to our needs for several  reasons.

     First, nearly  all these models  are one-dimensional and therefore they do
not take into account advection and horizontal  variations in z2, w2,  Q and the
other governing fields.

     Second, our interest  in regional modeling is with historical situations
where  available  observations exist  from which Z2 can  be  inferred,  at  least
approximately, not  only  at the initial moment t0 of the simulation period but
also at discrete intervals throughout it.  In general, the z2 predictions of a
model  initialized  at to  will  become  increasingly  inconsistent with  later
observations due to  deficiencies  in  the model and errors  in  the input  data.
Our position  is that  the  values of  z2  inferred  from meteorological  observa-
tions made during the  simulation period are more credible than the predictions
                                    146

-------
made by a  model.   Therefore,  in our approach the physical principles on which
models are based  are  employed in the role  of  interpolating and extrapolating
the discrete observations.  This is the essence of the roles performed by Eqs.
(8-2), (8-45) and (8-49) in our scheme above.

     At this time,  the  proposed procedure has not been tested.   Therefore, it
should be  viewed  as the starting point in the development of a scheme capable
of providing the various required parameter fields.

     In the  remainder of this section we present the detailed steps needed to
produce an operational processor.
Stage ZQ
     As noted  in  the introduction, when cumulus clouds are not present during
daylight  hours,  z2  is the  highest elevation  that  dry thermals  produced by
surface heating can reach; however, once cumulus clouds form, z2 is defined to
be  the  lifting condensation  level.   In  either case,  z2  can  be  inferred, at
least approximately,  from radiosonde  data and we expressed this  in the form
(8-14) of a function F that relates z2 to the potential temperature and mixing
ratio vertical profiles.   Our first task  here  is  to develop an explicit form
for F.
                                                               i
     Our  approach  stems  from the  realization that  turbulence  acts to destroy
spatial variations  in  scalar quantities.  According  to the empirical K-theory
                                    147

-------
description of  turbulent mixing, the  rate at which spatial  fluctuations  are
eliminated  is  inversely  proportional  to  the square  of  the size  A. of  the
fluctuation. This  is  evident from  the Fourier  transform  of the  classical
diffusion equation
          H =
                3z
From this equation one finds that the Fourier amplitude A of spatial variation
in the scalar c of wave number k = 2n/\ decays in time at the rate

          f£ = -Kk2A.                                                    (8-53)

Sources  of  c can  generate  small  scale  variations  but  turbulence  always
destroys them.

     These observations suggest that if second and higher order derivatives of
a conservative, scalar quantity remain large for an extended period of time at
points  in the fluid  that are  far from  sources,  the intensity  of turbulent
mixing at  these  points,  as manifested in the diffusivity K in Eqs. (8-52) and
(8-53), must  be  very  small.   Otherwise, the small-scale variations that cause
large values of these derivatives would be eradicated.

     Thus, our basic  premise  is that in cloud free conditions we can estimate
the elevation  at which the vertical diffusivity becomes  vanishingly small by
examining  the vertical  profiles  of  the  second,  and  perhaps  higher,  order
derivatives of the  mixing ratio and potential  temperature,  both of which are
(approximately)   conservative   quantities  that  can  be   derived  from  the
radiosonde measurements.
                                    148

-------
     Consider  for  example  the  classical  profiles  of  mixing  ratio  q  and
potential temperature  6 in dry,  convective conditions  illustrated  in  Figure
8-3a.   In  Figure 8-3b  we  show  the  corresponding profiles  of d2q/dz2  and
d28/dz2.  In  this idealized  example,  the product of these  derivatives  has a
large negative value at the  top of the mixed layer, i.e.,
                     <« o at z = z2.                                    (8-54)
           dz2  dz2

     We  can  estimate  the  derivatives of  a  given  parameter  £ measured  at
discrete points  in  space by representing the parameter values measured in the
vicinity of  the point of  interest  by a polynomial.   Suppose that  we  want an
estimate of  d2£/dz2 at  the point  z=z" but  that £ is  known  only  at discrete
points ZL z2,  ...  Zj  that are not necessarily equally spaced.   Let us denote
the £ values at these points by

          &i =C(V zi'to)  • i=1.2.---I                               (8'55)
where we assume  that £  is a parameter measured at rawin station m at time to-
We  can  estimate the  second derivative of  t,  as  well  as  other properties of
interest at  the  desired elevation z" by expanding £ in a polynomial about z".
Thus, let

          t(z) = a0 + ain + a2q2 + a3r}3                                 (8-56)
where
          n = z-z".                                                     (8-57)
                                    149

-------
                                                                       d20
                (a)
(b)
             Figure 8-3.  (a) Idealized profiles of mixing ratio
                              q and potential temperature 0 in dry,
                              convective conditions.
                          (b) Second derivatives of the profiles
                              illustrated in panel a.
We can obtain  the  four constants a0,  ...  a3  in (8-56) from  four values of £

and  their   corresponding  measurement  locations   z..    The  most  accurate


                                    150

-------
representation  is  obtained  by using  the four  successive measurements  of  £,

shown  in  Figure  8-4,  that  straddle  the  point  z".   Two  of these  are  from

elevations below z"  and  two  are from higher elevations.   For convenience, let

us denote these  four points  by zl9 z2, z3 and z4, as indicated in the Figure;

and  let  the  associated  £  measurements be  designated  £x  ...  £4.    In  this

notation we have from (8-56)
           Figure 8-4.   Illustration of the points (dots) at which
                        measurements of £ are available; and the point
                        z" at which a measure of d*£/dz2 is desired.
                        Values of £ measured at the points z., i=l,...4
                        centered at z" are used to approximate £(z) in
                        a polynomial about z".
             = a0 + atni + a2n.? + asnf
                    *

                                                                        (8-58)
where

          n. = z.-z".                                                   (8-59)
           I    i


Solving the  system  of equations (8-58) for  the  a's is straightforward and we

obtain


                                    151

-------
     a  = BiAtg -   2An
      2   A2A12-A11A2
      2112-1122
                                                                   (8-60)
                                                                   (8-61)
            (nf-ni)
                                                                        (8-62)




                                                                        (8-63)


                                                                        (8-64)


                                                                        (8-65)


                                                                        (8-66)


                                                                        (8-67)


                                                                        (8-68)


                                                                        (8-69)


The  coefficients  a0,  ...  a3  provide  the following  useful  properties  of  £:
A22 =
- (nl-n§)(n?-ni)

- (n§-nl)(n|-nl)
     t(2=z") - a0
                                                                        (8-70)
                                                                   (8-71)
        2=2"
                               152

-------
                  = 2a2                                                 (8-72)
                                                                        (8'73)
           z"+6z
            C(z)dz = 2(6z)a0 + |(6z)3a2                                 (8-74)
           z"-6z

     Now that  we have  formulated  a method  of estimating  the  derivatives of
parameters measured at discrete points, we can proceed to estimate Z2.

     Let
          ezz =     .                                                    (8-76)
The steps for Stage 2Q are as follows:
     (1)  Applying  the  procedure outlined  above for  estimating  derivatives.
          [specifically  (8-60)  - (8-69)  and (8-72)] to the  mixing ratio and
          potential temperature soundings q (z,to) and 0 (z,to), respectively,
          compute
                                          k = 1, ... 60
at rawin station m (=1 on the first pass through this stage) at hour to, where
                                    153

-------
          zk= zt(v  + 25m + ^                                       (8"77)
and       Az = 50 m.
     (2)  Next form the products
               Pk = ^zk''W  .  ""I.  -  W                      (8-78)
and from this find
              P  = max(-P.).                                             (8-79)
                    k    k
This value of P pertains  to  the site x  of  rawin  station  m  and  to  hour to  of
the sounding.
     (3)  Next we estimate z2 to be (units of m MSL).
                         = F(q(xm,t0),
                                                                        (8-80)
                    = zt(xm) + 25 + 50k*
          where k* is the smallest integer for which
               Pk* = - P.                                                 (8-81)
     (4)  We  also  need for use in Eq. 8-34  an  estimate of the  range  ±6z2  of
          elevations in which  the  actual  elevation z2 of  the  mixed layer top
          is  likely to lie.
                                    154

-------
     We  anticipate that  a measure  of  622  is  the width of the  interval
     centered at  z=zk*  in which Pk has a  magnitude  of, say,  60% of  its
     peak value  .   Examination of the  third order derivatives  of q  and 0
     might also  provide  a  useable measure of  622-    At  this  time,  no
     information is  available  on which  to base a quantitative  rule  for
     estimating the  range of  22  values.   Therefore,  we will  assume  for
     now that

               622 = 100m (interim assumption)                      (8-82)
     and after we  have  gained  experience with actual soundings,  we will
     attempt to formulate an empirical  rule for estimating  622.

(5)  Compute the lifting condensation  level (LCL) at  each surface weather
     station n=l,...N at  the hour to  of the upper air  observations used
     above in  step 3  to  estimate 22-   The  elevation  of the LCL is  found
     first in pressure coordinates as  follows.
     Let  q   and  0  be  the mixing ratio  (dimensionless)  and  potential
     temperature (°K), respectively, at surface weather  station n.
     These data  are  available from Processor  P3.    If  a  parcel of  air
     originally at ground level  in the vicinity of the  station is lifted
     without mixing with ambient air,  both the mixing ratio and potential
     temperature  will  be  conserved.   Thus,  at  any  altitude p(mb)  the
     vapor pressure in the air  parcel  will  be
                      pq
     (cf Eq.  3-2a), and its temperature will be
                               155

-------
                                                             (8-83b)
               n   p

(cf Eq. 3-6).  The  elevation  p.p.  of the  lifting  condensation  level
is defined  as  the  altitude where  the parcel's vapor pressure e  is
the  saturation  vapor  pressure  e .   The  latter  is a  function  of
temperature alone, namely

          es = 8oexf4(T '  T)]                               (8"83c)
where eQ  = 40mb, TQ = 302°K, L =  2500 joule g"1, and  R=0.461  joule
g  °K  .   Hence, p.p.  is  the  solution of the equation

          0.622"+ q    = eoexp[S (3U2 " T)]                 (8"83d)
where T is given by(8-83b).  Eq.  (8-83d)  can be solved  approximately
by substituting successively  smaller  values of p into  the equation,
beginning with  the surface pressure;  and considering  the  solution
PLCL  to be the  Pressure at  wnich  tne left  Slde  of  (8-83d)  first
exceeds the right side.

Using   the   pressure-height   functions   PmC2'^)   available   from
processor PI,  convert p.p. into  elevation Zj^,  (m  MSL)  as follows
          zLCL(xn,t0) = z*                                    (8-84)

where z* is the elevation for which

          p(xn,z*,t0) = PLCL(Vt0).                           (8"85)
                          156

-------
     The  function on the  left  side  of  (8-85)  can  be  obtained  by  applying
     an   inverse   r  weighting   interpolation   to   the   set  of  Pm(z,t0)
     profiles,  namely
                          M
          P(Xn,z,to)  =
     At the end of  this  step we have values  of Z|Q.(to)  at all  N surface
     weather stations.   The M rawin stations  whose soundings we  are using
     to determine  Z2 are a subset of the N surface stations.
(6)  At this step we  must  decide whether z2 is to be the elevation given
     by  (8-80)  or  the  elevation z,p.  given  by  (8-84).   As  we  noted
     earlier,  the decision  rests solely on whether a  (x  ,to)  is  greater
     than or equal  to  zero.   In particular
                         Z2(xm,t0) if ac(xm,t0) = 0;
          z2(xm,t0) =
                         zi_CL(~m'to)  (Eq>  8~84)>  otherwise.
     where
          ZjsCX.to) = value given by Eq.  8-80.                      (8-88)
     There are two  situations  here that signal the presence  of an error
in our estimates of z£ and/or Z.  The first is
            (xm,t0) = 0 and z^LCx^to) <[zKxm,t0) - 6z2];        (8-89)
                               157

-------
     and the second is

          ac(Vto) * ° 204 z|_CL(Vto)
     The  first  condition  indicates  that clouds  are  not  forming  even
     though our estimates   of z^  and the mixed  layer depth  indicate
     that  they  should;  and  (8-90)  implies  the  opposite,  namely,  that
     clouds are  forming even  though  our estimates  indicate that  they
     should not.  If either  (8-89) or (8-90)  is  true  at site  xm at hour t0
     this  should   be  recorded  for  output   from  Stage  ZQ.    Frequent
     occurrences of these conditions would indicate  some systematic error
     in the calculation procedures.

(7)  Next we compute 23.  As  we noted earlier (see Eq.  8-15)

                         Z2(xn,to) + 100   ,  if ac(xm,t0) = 0;
                                                                   (8-91)
                               m'to)  *   Otnerw1se
     where ZjClJ   is  the average elevation (m MSL) of the tops of cumulus
     clouds, an input to P8 derived from satellite data.

(8)  From (8-11)  and (8-70)

               qc(xm,t0) =  q(xm,z2,t0) = a0>q(z2,t0)               (8-92)

     where  a     is the  coefficient aQ of  the expansion of  q about the
     point  z"=z2.     This  coefficient  is found  from  the  mixing  ratio
     sounding and Eqs. (8-60) - (8-69).
                               158

-------
(9)  From (8-18) and (8-70)

               q00(xm,t0) = q(xm,z3,t0) = a0jq(z3,to)               (8-93)
     where a     is  obtained as  in  step (8-8)  except the  expansion  is
     about the elevation z"=z3.

(10) From (8-8) and (8-74) we have

          M3(xm,t0) = /[Az a0)q(zk,to) + ^ (Az)3a2)q(zk,t0)]     (8-94)

     where k2  is  the altitude  interval  given by (8-77) that is  nearest
     Z2(xm,t0), i.e.,

          Iz2(xm,t0) - (zt(xm) + 25 + k2Az)| = minimum             (8-95)
     and similarly k3 is the integer that minimizes
          I23(xm>t0) - (zt(xm) + 25 + k3Az)| = minimum;            (8-96)
     and Az= 50m  as  in  (8-77).   The coefficients a     and a2   in (8-94)
     are derived from the q sounding data using formulas (8-60) -  (8-69).
(11) From (8-9)
                                  - z2(xmJt0)
                                                                   (8.g7)
(12) Repeat steps 1-8 at rawin station m for the next observation hour
     to    obtain    Z2(xm,t1),    Z3(xn),t1),    qc(xm,t1),    q^C
          ,t!) and 3.  (In  general, ti = t0 + Atm, where Atm is
                               159

-------
     the  interval   between   observations  at  station  m;  so  we   should
     actually  write  tx   rather   than   tj   to  designate  the   second
     observation   time.    However,   this   distinction   is   not   important
     because in the analyses that  follow, we  treat the observations  on  a
     station-by-station   basis   and  interpolate  hourly   values  of   the
     desired quantities  at each  site.)
(13) Construct linear functions  of qc,  q^ and  3  for  use  in  integrating
     these values with respect to time  from  t0 to ti.   That is
                                                  t0  <  t  <  ti       (8-98)
                                     3(t-t0)
     where
          % = tQc(4.t!)  - qc(xm,t0)](trt0)"1                     (8-99)

     with similar expressions for q^ and 3  [see  (8-19b)  and  (8-23)].

(14) Repeat steps 1-10 above  for each of the M  rawin  stations,  and then
     repeat all  steps  for  each  observation  interval  in  the period  for
     which  the  regional   model   is  to be  operated.    The observation
     interval  is usually  not  the same at each upper air station.   Figure
     8-5  illustrates  a   hypothetical   situation   in   which  the  model
     simulation  period is  of  length T  beginning at  hour t0  and  the
     stations make soundings at a variety of  intervals.
                               160

-------
Station m
Station 3
Station 2
Station 1
                    t              t                                  t
                     om             im                                 2m
                              Model Simulation Period
                    to                                      t0+ T.
           Figure 8-5.   Illustration of possible relationships among
                        the intervals at which upper air soundings are
                        made at a set of rawin stations.
          At the end  of  the operations in Stage ZQ  there should be values of
          Z2, 6z2, 23, qc>  q^,  3 and M3  for  each station m=l,...M and for
          each  observation  interval   in   the  model  simulation  period  T.
          illustrated in Figure 8-5.
Stage PATH
     In Stage ZQ  we  derived estimates of the  parameters  required to evaluate
the fixed point  time integrals that enter in Eqs.  (8-45) and (8-49).  In this
stage we  estimate  the  trajectories necessary to evaluate the path integrals §
that enter into these equations.
                                    161

-------
     We are still  considering the time interval  to < t < tj. and we require the
backward trajectories that begin  at each of the rawin stations at hour ti and
go  back in  time  to to-   That is, we  need to  know the  location  x(t;x jtO
during the  interval  to  <  t <  tj  of the air parcel that arrives at station x
at hour tj.  By definition
                                                                       (8-100)
and by previous declaration (see Figure 8-2)
                               i).                                      (8-101)
     We  will  compute  the trajectories  using  the  horizontal  velocities v2u
measured  in  the  vicinity of  z2.   These  velocities  control   the  rate  of
advection  of  the  mixed  layer height  (see Eq.  8-2);  but the  effective path
along which the  surface  heat flux Q is determined is more likely fixed by the
vertically averaged  horizontal  flow beneath z2.  In actuality the temperature
of a vertical  column of air of depth z2-zt at x  at time tj is affected by the
surface heat flux  in a plume-shaped area whose width a  increases from zero at
xm at t=ti to a value of the order
~m       x
          c-y(x;) ~ (t1-t0)Av                                           (8-102)
at  the  upstream starting point of  the trajectory that ends at  x  at t^  In
(8-102) Av is the magnitude of the vertically integrated horizontal wind  shear
in  the  mixed  layer.   Since we are representing the heating rate of the column
as  an  unknown  function G multiplied by the surface heat flux variations  along
the  trajectory  between x1  and x , we can assume that  the  difference in the
        J     J          ~m      ~m
integrated heat  flux along the trajectory extracted from the winds v2^ at the
level  z2  and  that along the  "correct"  trajectory is absorbed in the function
G.
                                    162

-------
     To compute  the trajectory  x1  to x   we will assume  that  there exists a
                                 ~m     ~m
routine, or  stage,  which  we will call  WV, which returns  an  estimate of the
vertical  wind  speed  w  and the  horizontal  wind  vector  VM   at   any  given
space-time point (x,z,t) in the NEROS domain.  Thus, when we write w(x,z,t) or
vu(x,z,t)  it will  be  understood  that  these values  are  available  from the
~n ~
routine WV which  we will  not specify here.  (In the first  generation model we
will employ  the  scheme developed by Bullock  (1983)  in the role of stage WV.)
For later reference let us signify this in equation form:

          w(x,z,t)
                      from Stage WV                                    (8-103)

     The  trajectories  can  now  be  generated using  the  following  recursive
formula:
                                -AtvH(x(t1-lAt;xm,t1),z2,t1-lAt)

where At  is a  time step  of  order 30  minutes.   Execution  of  (8-104) is the
first step in the operation of Stage PATH, i.e.,

     (1)  Solve  (8-104)  for  the trajectories x(t;x  .tj), t0  <  t < tj at each
          of the M upper air stations.
     In  the  next  steps  we  use  these  trajectories  to  evaluate  the  path
integrals in (8-45) and  (8-49).
                                    163

-------
(2)  Determine the  variations in  w2, a.,  and  Q  along  each of  the M
     trajectories  generated  in  step 1 for  the period  t0  <  t  < tj.  and
     express the  results  in the following  functional  forms:
          to
          W2m(t) = *<*(*: V*^' V^                            <
          acm(t) = (^(xCtjx^tO.t)                                (8-106)
          Qm(t) = QCxCtjx^tO.t)                                  (8-107)
     where

          *2m = ^Z2(xm,to)^2(xm,t1)].                            (8-108)
(3)  Now compute the following path integrals:
         r  » — *•     	         i~n "" *"rrnx "•*•  o*"*~'                  *•   iU*/y
          t0   c                J  u    cm
                                                                  (8-111)
          to
     where
          J = (t!-t0)/At                                          (8-112)

(4)  Repeat  the  three steps above  for  each of the M  rawin  stations  and
                               164

-------
          for  each of  the  observation intervals within the model  simulation
          period   (see  Figure 8-5).  At the end of Stage PATH,  there should  be
          values  of the path integrals I , I  and In (Eqs.  8-109 -  8-111) for
                                        W   U      w
          each  rawin station for each observation interval in  the  simulation
          period  T.
Stage WEWC
     Here we attempt to solve (8-45) for the function G(xm;t1,t0),  which  will
provide the  entrainment  velocity  field w (x,t) through  (8-39);  and  equation
(8-49) for wc(xm;ti,to) which will provide the cumulus updraft speed  w (x,t).

     (1)   Using the estimates (8-98)  of the temporal  variations in   q ,  and
          3  at each upper air site  x^  in  the  period t0 < t < ti,  and the
          surface heat  flux Q(x_>t)  in this  period,  compute the following
          integral:

                               J
               Ux_;ti,t0) = At2[3 + a_(x .ti-jAt)'
                 ~m            ^o    m              c ~®

                    (qc(xm,t1-jAt)-3)]Q(xm,t1-jAt)       (8-113)
     (2)   Compute the  parameter (see 8-43):
                                 -i   JL qr(xm,ti-jAt)a (x ,ti-jAt)
                      =  [I.-CtO]  AtI-£-S	$-2
                          am          J=o   i-arx^trjAt)
where xcn)(ti) is from Stage  PATH, Eq. 8-110.
                                   165

-------
     In  Eq.  8-45,  AZ2 is a  measure  of the change  in  z2  between the starting
point x^ and the end point x^ of the trajectory that arrives at x  at time tj.
As we  noted  earlier,  we have an estimate of z2 at xm at tt but no measurement
of z2 at x' at t0.
     Let us  assume  that t0 is the initial instant of the time period in which
data for the regional  model  are required and that t0 is also an hour at which
rawin data are  routinely collected.   At this  initial  moment we must use some
objective analysis  method  to  determine z2 in the model domain.  Subsequently,
we can  use the  prognostic equation 8-2 to  obtain z2. Thus, to estimate z2 at
x^ at  time  t0,  we  first  estimate  z2 at  each of the m  rawin stations using
(8-87) (Stage ZQ), and we estimate the likely error bounds ±5z2(xm,t0) on this
estimate  at   each  x^  (see step 4  of Stage  ZQ).   Next,   we  apply the  r"
interpolation formula  to  obtain Z2(x||),t0).   To  do this  we must  take into
account  the  possibility  that  cumulus  clouds  are  present  between  rawin
stations.   In this  instance  the z2 estimates obtained at the station sites x
will  not represent the lifting condensation level, which is the altitude of z2
wherever ac(x,t0) 1  0.   Thus,  we  assign Z2(x(|1,t0)  values according  to  the
following rule:
                         M
                         I tr,.
                         I j r.  I   z2(x.,to)
                        i=l' ~1m       ]

'  1f ac(*m'to) = 0;
                                                                      (8-115a)
                                                , otherwise
                         (8-115b)
                                    166

-------
where
                = E(x -x')2 + (y-yi)2]11,                              (8-116)
           ~nm    u""n "m'    wn 'm
ZLCL  1S  91ven by (8-84),  Z2(x.:,to)  is given by (8-87)  and  the summations in
(8-115a) are  over  all  M rawin stations while  in (8-1155) they are over all N
surface weather stations.

                        i   -1
     We apply the  same |r   interpolation  formula  to estimate 6z2 at x'.  At
                         -                                             ~m
all times  t = t1}  t2, etc.  after t0,  we will have  estimates  of z2(x,t) from
the prognostic equation 8-2  (output of  Stage  W2 described  below).   In this
case  z2(xm,t) must  be  assumed  to be  exact (i.e.,  6z2(x' t)=0).  Errors are
allowed  only  at  the  end  points  of  the  time  intervals that  we  treat.   For
example,  in tx <  t < t2> we  assume 6z2(tx)=0 but  we  allow  finite values of
6z2(t2) at  each rawin station.
     Thus, step 3 of this stage (WEWC) is as follows:
     (3)   a.  If to  is  the initial instant  of  the regional model simulation
               period, determine Z2(xm,t0),m=l,...M from (8-87) (Stage ZQ) and
               Z2(xl,t0) from (8-115).  Then  estimate 6z2(x  ,t0),m=l,...M (see
               step  4,  Stage  ZQ)  and  subsequently  6z2(x' t0)  using  these
               values and (8-115).
           b.  If t0  is  not the initial instant of the model simulation, then
               Z2(x,t0)  is   available  at  all grid  points  x  from  Stage  Z2,
               described below; and 6z2(x^,t0) = 0  everywhere.
     (4)       We  can now  estimate  the range  of values  (8-44)  in which  the
               parameter  AZ2 that enters  in  (8-45)  lies.   Recall from  (8-34)

                                    167

-------
that AZ2 is the difference in the z2  values  measured  at (x',t0)



and (x .ti).   We find after some thought that
    v~ffl  i'                          a
                                              -  [Z2(x;,t0)
                                                        (8-117)
                                      ~m*
                                              -  I[z2(x'  t0)
                                                        (8-118)
(5)
We now  solve (8-45)  for  the minimum  and  maximum values  of G



(see 8-46)  in the  vicinity of xm during the  interval  t0 < t <
                               ~                          —   —
                   IOT(ti)  and ^(x^)  and
                                   and IQm ^ 0;
                                     ,  if
                                      0;
     0, if I(ti) 1 0.
            Qm
= (8"119) with
                                    replaced by
                                                        (8-119)
                                                        (8-120)
                                      is  from (8-117), AZ2C )max  is  from
In  Eq.  (8-119), AZ2(



(8-118),  Iwm(ti)  is  from  (8-109),  IQm(ti)  is from  (8-111),



J   (tx)  is  from (8-110), I(  )  is  from (8-113), qr(  )  is from
 Oui                                              ^»


(8-114), and A  is given by (8-30).
                     168

-------
(6)       Next  we must  check  whether  the  upper  bound  G     on G  is
                                                            iiiciX
          positive.   If it  is  not,  we must return  to  Stage ZQ and alter
          the value of q   and,  if necessary,  the other parameters listed
          in (8-47) until  the  resulting integrals I, q ,  etc. in (8-120)
                                                       \*
          yield a value for G__v  that is positive,  and preferably of an
                             maX
          order of  magnitude consistent with  (8-40).   The  procedure  for
          altering the  variables  in  (8-47)  must  be  developed through
          experimentation   (refer  again  to   the  paragraphs  preceding
          (8-47)) and  therefore we  will  not attempt  to define  it here.
          Thus, if  G(x ,tt)    > 0»  9° to  steP ?'» otherwise return to
          Stage ZQ and begin modification of q ,  etc. as described above.
(7)       We can  arrive at  this  step only  after the  previous  analyses
          have produced a  range  of G values that lies at least partially
          on the positive,  real axis.  We assume, therefore, that

               Go < GCt.) < 6M                           (8-121)

          where
               Go = •nax[0,G(xm,t1)m.n].                           (8-122)

          We now  compute  limiting values for  the  cloud updraft velocity
          parameter w .
                                          tu
               FA(x ,ti) + GQ!(X  iti,to)JLQ,.(\.,»ti,to)*
                  ~m           ~m          c ~m

                     cm  ^     ,  if q  and *   ^ 0;               (8-123)
                               169

-------
         where
                    t1-jAt)[3
                    qc(xm,t1-jAt)ac(xm,t1-jAt)
                                   - 3]  }            (8-124)
          In this expression M3 is from  (8-94); z3  is from  (8-91); 3,
          q ,  and q^ are from  (8-98);  w(x,z,t)  is the vertical  velocity
          function  solution  or  stage WV defined  earlier  just before
          (8-103);  and  z    is   defined  by   (8-108)  with   a   similar
          definition for z .  .
                          sm
               ^(xm,t1)mav = Eq.  (8-123)  with G0  replaced by
                c ~m    max                                        (8-125)
(8)       If  w (x ,ti)      <   0   and   LmC^i)   and   qc(x  ;ti,t
          then return  to  Stage  ZQ  and  alter q^  and,  if necessary,  the
          other  parameters  in  list (8-51)  until  Eq.   (8-125) yields  a
          positive value  for w c(xin>ti)max-   The  alteration process  is
          similar   to   that  discussed   earlier  in  connection  with  the
          calculation  of G (see  the paragraph preceding (8-51)  and step 6
          above.   When a  range  WG( )min < wc <  WG( )max has  been found
          that lies at least partially on the positive  real  axis,  proceed
          to step  9.
                               170

-------
(9)       At  this  point  a   range   of  values  of  GCx^ti)  has  been

          established (in step 7,  Eqs.  8-121 and 8-122); and a range of

          w(.(x[n,t1) has been  computed in steps 7 and 8,  namely
          where the  upper  bound  is  positive.   We now select  from these

          ranges the following  values  for site xm for the interval t0 to
               G(x ,tj) = value in the range (8-121) that
                 ~m       satisfies (8-40) closest;                (8-127)


               wr(x _,ti) = solution of (8-49) with G
                c ~m       given by (8-127) and all                (8-128)
                           other parameters with values
                           determined in step 8.
          We assume  that  these values  are  constant  at  xm during  the

          entire interval t0 < t < ti, specifically, we assume
               G(x  t) = G(x ,
                  ra        ^           t0 < t < ^               (8-129)
          These values should  be  recorded for each hour  in  the interval

          t0 to tt  for  site x .   Note that  tlt  which is the hour of the

          rawin observation  following  that  at t0, is not necessarily the

          same hour for  all  rawin stations.  (See Figure 8-5).   This does

          not pose  a  problem  because  we apply  (8-129) to  each  station

          separately to obtain hourly estimates of G and w .
                               171

-------
     (10)      Repeat step 9 for each interval  in the model  simulation period.
               This will produce hourly  values  of G and w  at rawin station m
               throughout the simulation  period  t0 to to + T.
     (11)      Repeat  steps  1-10  for each  rawin  station  in=l.,...M.   At the
               conclusion of Stage WEWC,  there  will be hourly values of G and
               w  at every  rawin station throughout the  simulation  period.
Stage W2
     We now begin  to  assemble the information gathered in the previous stages
to  solve   the  prognostic  equation (8-2)  for  z2  over  the model  space-time
domain.  First, we construct the entrainment velocity field.

     (1)  Starting at the initial instant t0 of the simulation period, collect
          the G values  at  this hour generated  in  Stage  WEWC at each of the M
          rawin stations  and  interpolate  them onto the  NEROS  grid using the
           .1
          r   weight:
G(x,t0) =     - - -                           (8-130)
             * |
            m=l
                                    ~
                                 ~m
          where x ranges over all grid points.

     (2)  Convert the G field into the w  field as follows (see 8-39):
               we(x,t0) = G(x,t0)Q(x,t0) (=f6/A0)                      (8-131)
                                    172

-------
     where Q is the  surface  heat flux in the  grid  cell  centered at x at
     time t0.   Note  that  wg(x,t) (designated f0/A8 in Part  1),  t0 < t <
     t0 + T is  an output of this  processor,  P8,  for each grid  point in
     the regional  model  domain.

(3)  We  construct  the  initial   z2  field at  each  grid  point using  the
     interpolation  scheme  (8-115)   employed   earlier   in  Stage  PATH.
     Specifically,

                      ("  Eq.  8-115a, if o (x,t0) = 0;
          Z2(x,t0) =  \                   c                        (8-132)
                      (_  Eq.  8-115b, otherwise

     where x ranges over all  grid points in  the model  region.

(4)  Interpolation of the cloud  updraft  velocities w   estimated at the
     rawin stations  in Stage WEWC requires  caution because  it may often
     happen that cumulus clouds are present  in isolated  areas that do not
     contain an  upper air station,  or are present at  station  locations
     between observation times.   To handle these situations we propose to
     compile a  semi-empirical   relationship  between w   and  cloud depth
     using all  w  ,  z2  and ZJQM estimated in the earlier analyses during
     the simulation  period T.   This function can be based on field data.
     For now compute  the  average of the w  values obtained in Stage WEWC
     for various values  of the  cloud thickness h3 = Zjp., - z2, say values
     of h3 at intervals  of 200m; and  call the resulting function W(h3).
     Then we assume
          wr(x,t0) = (l-ff(x)Mz   (x,t0)-z2(x,t0))
           c ~            ~     ICU -        -                    (8-133)
                               173

-------
     where
         W(ha) = w   for  clouds  of depth ha  (an empirical          (8-134)
                     function);
          a(x)  = distance weighting  function
                                                                  (8-135)
               =exP[-|x-xmi/SIG]


     x  is the  rawin site  closest  to x where w  2  0;  SIG is a  distance

     constant,  e.  g., 50km;  and
          wcLOCAL(*'to)  = wc(~m'to)'                               (8-136)


     Formula (8-133) is  an  heuristic  expression  that assigns w   a value
                                                               V*

     that is determined  partly by any  w  estimates  that  have  been  derived

     for that  location  in  the earlier stages  and  partly by the  assumed

     empirical  relationship  between  cloud  depth  and  updraft velocity.




     Note that wc(x,t), with x  ranging  over all grid  points and  t  over

     all  hours  in  the  simulation  period T,  is  an  output  of  this

     processor, P8.



(5)  For the advection  velocity  field v2H required in Eq. (8-2)  at time

     to, we will  use
          V2H(x,t0) = [22(x)to)-zt(x)f1    vH(x,z,t0)dz           (8-137)
     where v(x,z,t) is the horizontal  wind at level  z from the routine WV

     described  earlier.    The  horizontal   velocities  that  WV  provides
                               174

-------
     should be  those  that  are  used to  compute  the  vertical  velocity
     w(x,z,t)  and they  should  be interpolated from the wind observation
     stations  to  each  grid point  x using  an  interpolation  scheme  that
     maintains  a  consistent  relationship  between   w(x,z,t)  and  the
     horizontal  winds vu(x,zit) at elevations z.  < z'<  z.
                      ~n ~                     t —  —

(6)  The vertical  air speed  at  each grid point  x at the initial moment to
     is obtained from the function routine WV as before,  namely

          w2(x,t0) = w(x,z2(x,t0),t0)                             (8-138)
     where the function on the  right side is a  part of  routine WV.

(7)  We  now  solve   (8-2)  for  z2(x,t0+At)  using  the  difference  scheme
     described in Appendix A to  Processor P7.   With this  scheme we have
          Z2(x,t0+At) = Jp(x,to+At|x;t0)[z2(x;t0)
                                    (8-139)
At S(x;t0)]dx'
     where
                               cc
                         (l-ac(xU0)) + we(xlt0)
     where a (x,t0) is the known fractional coverage of cumulus clouds at
     time t0  in the  grid cell centered  at  x;w2 is from (8-138); wc is
     from (8-133); wg is from (8-131); and
          p(x,tix',t') = known function of y2H-  (see Chapter 9, Part 1)
                                                                  (8-141)
                               175

-------
     (8)  At  this  point  we have  computed z2(x,to+At).   From this  field we
          construct z3 in the manner of (8-91), namely
                              Z2(x,t0+At) + 100, if o-c(x,t0+At) = 0;
          Z3(x,t0+At) =  {                                             (8-142)
                              z-j-pu(x i t0+At) ,  otherwi se
          where z-p~y is the known elevation of cumulus tops.   This calculation
          should be  performed at  all  grid points x  and  the  results retained
          for output from P8.

     (9)  The  material  surface  flux H3 across surface H3 must be computed at
          each grid point at time t0 + At as  follows:

               H3(x,t0+At) = z3(x,t0+At) + y3H-VHz3
                              -W(x,z3(x,t0+At),t0+At)                  (8-143)
where
                                  Z3(x,t0+ At)-z3(x,t0)
                    Z3(x,t0+At) = - -  -               (8-144)
                    ysH(x,t0+At) = y(x,z3(x,t0+At),t0+At)              (8-145)
          and
               v3u4VHz3 = calculated from v3H and z3 in the            (8-146)
                          manner of (8-A2)7  See the Appendix
                          to this section.
          In (8-143), w(  )  denotes the function routine WV.  The same applies
          to v( ) in (8-145).  The flux H3 is an output of processor P8 but it
          is not used in the calculations performed within this processor.  At
          the initial moment t0, assume
                                    176

-------
          H3(x,t0) = HaCx.to+At)                                  (8-147)


(10) We must also  output  the local time derivative z2 at each grid point

     and each hour:
                        z2(x,t0+At) - z2(x,t0)
          Z2(x,t0+At) =	 .                   (8-148)
     assume
                0) = z2(x,t0+At).                                  (8-149)


     These fields are outputs of P8 at each hour.



(11) Compute the  thickness  of  Layer 3 at  each  grid  point at time t0+At:


          h3(x,t0+At) = Z3(x,t0+At) -Z2(x,t0+At)                  (8-150)


     where z3 is  from  (8-142)  and z2  is  from  (8-139).   Evaluate (8-150)

     for output only when t0+At is an integral  number of hours.



(12) Compute the thickness of Layer 2 for output:


          h2(x,t0+At) = Z2(x,t0+At) - ZT(X) - Mx.to+At)         (8-151)

      \
     where z2 is  from  (8-139)  and ZT  and  hi  are  inputs to Processor P8.

     Compute (8-151) only at integral hours.



(13) Compute the elevation of surface z3 in pressure coordinates.


          P3(x,t0+At) = p(x,z3(x,t0+At),t0+At)                    (8-152)
                               177

-------
     where p(x,z,t), which  is given  by  (8-86),  is the pressure  (mb)  at
     elevation  z  (m  MSL)  over  site x  at hour  t.    This  function  is
     interpolated  from  the  pressure-height functions  Pm(x,t) that  are
     inputs  from  Processor  PI.   The  field  p3   is  an  output of  this
     processor,  P8,  at  each grid point and hour.

(14) Compute the elevation of surface z2  in pressure coordinates:

          P2(x,t0+At) = p(x,z2(x,t0+At),t0+At)                     (8-153)

     where  p  is  given by  (8-86).   The  field p2   is  an  output  of  this
     processor at  each  hour of the simulation period.

(15) In  Part  1,  Eq.  5-44,  we  defined  the  function >H(x,t)  to  be  the
     fraction of the volume flux entering cumulus  clouds in the grid cell
     centered at x at time t that originates in Layer 0.   Here we compute
     an interim estimate V*  of this parameter based strictly on heuristic
     notions.    In  Processor P12  we  test whether  the I'1   values  derived
     here  satisfy  criterion  (5-47)  of  Part 1.    If   they  meet  this
     condition  they  become  the  final   estimate   of the  parameter  4*.
     Otherwise y(x,t)  is  given the largest  value  that satisfies  (5-47).
     As a rough, heuristic approximation we shall  assume
                                   2h3(x,t0+At)       2
          ¥' (x,t0+At) = 0.5 exp  -[-      3
     Under  this  assumption,  ¥  -» 0.1  as  the  depth  of cumulus  clouds
     becomes large compared  to  the depth (z2-Zy) of  the subcloud layer.
     For  shallow  cumulus,  t  -»  0.6.   The  H*1   field   is  an  output  of
     Processor P8 each hour.
                               178

-------
Stage WV
     This stage  is in  effect  a function  routine that  provides  vertical  and
horizontal  wind  speeds  at  any  grid  cell   and elevation,  and  horizontal
divergence between any two surfaces in any grid cell.

     As  with nearly  all  of  the  input parameters  required in  the  regional
model,  the   variables  just  cited  can  be  estimated by  a number  of  methods.
Solutions of the omega equation, isentropic analyses,  and differentiation of
functions fit to wind data  are several approaches.  Our intent here is not to
prescribe the use  of  one  particular technique  but  rather to  specify which
quantities are required for subsequent use in this and other processors in the
network,  and in  the regional  model itself.  Selection  of specific techniques
is left  to  the  "user".  Indeed, one  of the  reasons for structuring the model
system  in a modular  form  was  to facilitate  the use  of  various techniques
interchangeably.    In  the  "first  generation"  processor  network  we   plan  to
employ in this stage, WV, the method developed by Bullock (1983).

     In  order to insure compatibility  between  the horizontal  divergences <6>
required  in  Processor Pll and the vertical velocities w  required in this and
other processors,  it  is advantageous, to compute  all  these fields in this one
stage.  Following is a  list of the divergences that must be computed each hour
for output to Processor Pll:

                                P3(x,y,t)
          <6(x,y,t)>3 = p^-    (VH-v)dp                              (8-155)
                         3  2
                                    179

-------
                                 P2(x,y,t)
                           1    ^(V^dp   ,   if APl(t)=l;
        <6(x,y,t)>2 =	"
                                 Pvs(x,y,t)
                                                                       (8-156)
                                 P2(x,y,t)
                                 (V^)dp  '   if ^i^0
                                 Px(x,y,t)
          <6(x,y,t)>1 = p .*    f (VH-v)dp  ,   defined only v/heri Ap^O (8_157)
                                 Pvs(x,y,t)

Since  the  input  wind data  are  in  z  coordinates,   it  will  be  necessary to
convert them  to p  coordinates  using the function p  (z,t)  available from PI.
Note also  that since  Po^p.  P?0 and the reciprocals
of  the pressure  differences  that  appear outside  these  integrals  are  also
negative.   The net result is that <6> has the same sign as VM-V.  We  leave the
method of computing the divergences (V,,'V) to the user.
     The  layer  averaged divergences  <6>   given by  (8-155, 156  and 157) are
related to  the vertical  velocity wn  on  the pressure  surfaces  p  that bound
each layer by (see Eqs. 11-lb and 11-40)
                                    180

-------
          <6(x,y,t)>n = ji- [u»n(x,y,t) - sT^x.y.t)]                  (8-158)
                          n
where
          Apn =  |Pn(x'y't} " Pp-i^y^l                             (8-159)
and  ui   denotes  the  vertical  velocity  in pressure  coordinates  (mb  sec  )
averaged over the surface p  within the grid cell centered at (x,y).  We shall
assume that the spatial variations in u> have such large scales that
          wn(x,y,t) - u>n(x,y,t)                                        (8-160)
where  u>  denotes  the local  value  of u>  on pressure  surface  p  at  the cell
        n                                                      rn
center (x,y).
     By definition
where p  is pressure  and w  is  the vertical velocity  in  z  coordinates at the
point where  p is  measured.   Making use of the  hydrostatic approximation and
(8-161), we can write

          % = 5? Pn+ Wn - Vn*                                 (8-162)
Two  of  the fields  that we  need  in  this  processor,   P8, are  w^ and  u^, the
vertical velocities in z coordinates  (m sec  ) on the  top surfaces of  Layers 3
and 2.  Eqs.  (8-158), (8-160), and (8-162) provide a means of estimating  these
velocities in  terms  of  the measured  horizontal  winds and  their divergence.
                                    181

-------
     We must distinguish  between  the  two cases Ap,=l and  Ap,=0.   Recall from
(7-98)  that  Ap-^t^l  if a  surface  inversion  is  present over  the  modeling
region at time  t  and it is zero  otherwise.   When an inversion is present the
effective ground  surface  for the  flow aloft  is  the  "virtual  surface"  p
defined as the top of the inversion layer.

     Mode 0:   Ap,  = 0.
     In  this  case  the virtual  surface coincides  with  the terrain.    Using
(8-158) and (8-159) we can express u  in the form
                                           + u>Q                        (8-163)

where uu is the value of u> at ground level.
     To  estimate ui  we  note first  that  the vertical  velocity w   at  ground
level is
          W0 = WT                                                 (8"164)
where ZT is the terrain height and v  is the horizontal wind velocity near the
ground.   Since horizontal gradients in terrain level are generally much larger
than  those  of the synoptic  scale  pressure  field p ,  we expect  that the last
term  on the  right side of (8-162) will  have  a much larger magnitude than the
term  involving Vu*p .   We also expect the last term to exceed the magnitude of
               ~ti  o
the  local  time  rate   of change of  p .   Thus,  to  good approximation  we can
assume

          u>  - -p gv -VHZT.                                            (8-165)
                                    182

-------
          W3 = p   [-H + *3-V3 " Ap3<5>3 '
Combining (8-162), (8-163), and (8-165) we have

                    9p,
                      '• + ^3*^HP3 " AP3<6:
                                          mode 0.                      (8-166)
                  J.   J.    U ~U ~~ll I
where

          Apj =  jp1(x,y,t) - Pvs(x,y,t)| ,    mode 0.                (8-166a)

We  assume  the velocity   and  divergence  fields  required  to  evaluate  this
equation  have been  extracted  from  the  wind data  that  are  inputs  to this
processor.  The pressure  surfaces p  are specified  by  those stages within P8
that call stage WV for iu estimates.
     To estimate the densities p3 and p , we use
                    P(x,t)
                     n
          "n'     RTTxTt)                                           <8-167>
                      n "*
where R is the gas constant and T  is the temperature at pressure level p  and
grid  point x  =  (x,y).   The  temperature  fields  will  be an  input  to  this
processor.  To evaluate  VHp3  and V^ in Eq. (8-166), it will be necessary to
fit a polynominal of at least 3-rd order to the pressure andi terrain data (see
Appendix to this chapter).

     The  expression  for w«  is obtained  in the same  manner  that (8-166) was
derived.  We get
                                    183

-------
                1     ™2
          wo = TTZ  ["of + vo*vuPo ~ Ap0<6>0 -
           2   P/>g    3t   ~2 ~Hr2    r2   2
                                                                       (8-168)
               + p gv *V,,zT],  mode 0

     Also  in  mode  0 we  require  for direct  use  in  the regional  model the
component of the  vertical  velocity w, on surface p., that is due to horizontal
divergence of the  flow  in Layer 1  (see  Eq.  3.1b of Part  1).   We denote this
velocity component by wn,  where
          wl = WT1 + "Dl = pTg [8T + *l-Vl • Apl<6>!
                            1                                           (8-169)
Since  by definition  w ^  is  the divergence  induced  vertical motion  on p,,
the terrain  induced  component is just the  right  side  of (8-169) with <6>,=0.
Thus,
                  AP-,
          wni = ' rr <6>i  » mode 0-                                  (8-170)
           UJ-     P^9    -1-
and Ap,  is  given by (8-166a).   In  order  to emphasize that this value applies
in mode  0  only,  we designate it wi, at the output of Pll.  Processor P12 will
take this field as input and generate the final, complete function w,,,
                                    184

-------
     Mode 1:   Ap., = 1
     In  this  state  an  inversion  layer  is  present  at the  ground and  the
effective bottom of the flow aloft is the virtual surface p  ,  which coincides
with terrain  features  that  extend  up through  the inversion  layer but which
otherwise  is  the top  of  the  inversion  layer itself.   In  this  situation  the
expression for u>_ becomes

                                 + u)vs.                                (8-171)
In order  to  obtain  an  estimate of uu   that is  consistent with the model used
in  P7  to  simulate   flow  in the  ground  level inversion,  we must  impose  the
constraint that the volume flux across p   is continuous.
     Just below  the top z    of the cold inversion  layer  the  downward volume
flux is
          dt

where  (u ,y ,w )  is  the  fluid  velocity in  the cold  layer;  and nvs  is the
cooling  rate,  a known function  of  space and time.  Just  above  zys,  i.e., at
the base of Layer 2, the downward volume flux is

Continuity of  the  flux across HVS requires that (8-172) and (8-173) be equal,
which is true  if
                                    185

-------
                3zvs       azvs       azvs
If we assume that the spatial gradients in z   are also much larger than those



in the  synoptic  pressure  field,  we can make  use  of the earlier approximation



(8-165) to obtain
          wvs " "Pvs^vs                                               (8-175)




where w   is given by (8-174).
     Combining (8-162), (8-171), (8-174), and (8-175) we get






                i   3P.
               P3g
   3

Csr5 + v~-Vupo  -  Ap,<6>-  -  Ap9<6>«]
 o t»    ^o ^n o      o   o      £    £
                                 --n].  model                (8-176)
and similarly
          W2 =
                                                                       (8-177)







               + 	 [57	 + %  *£lJZ   ~ ^  ^ »  mOC^e 1






In both (8-176) and (8-177)






          Ap2 = |p2(x,y,t) - pvs(x,y,t)  | ,  mode 1                    (8-178)





In mode  1 no estimate of w  at  the top of layer 1 is required because in this



situation the volume flux is given by n.vs-








                                    186

-------
     The input  requirements and  outputs  of Stage WV are  summarized in Table
8-1.     Figure   8-6   illustrates   processor  P8   and  its   data   interfaces
schematically.
                                    187

-------
               Table 8-1.   Summary of the input and output requirements
                           of each stage of Processor P8.
Input
Variable
                Description
Source    Stage
                                          Output
                                          Variable
                                                                       Description
qm(z,t)
em(z,t)
qn(t)
en(t)
             mixing ratio at         PI
             elevation z (m MSL)
             at hour t over rawin
             station m.
potential temperature  PI
(°K) at elevation z
(m MSL) at hour t over
rawin station m.
                                  ZQ
             mean terrain ele-
             vation (m MSL) in
             grid cell centered
             at x .
                       P7
mixing ratio (dimension- P3
less) at surface weather
station n at time t.
potential temperature  P3
(°K) at surface weather
station n at time t.
                                                                    elevation (m MSL)
                                                                    of top surface of
                                                                    model  layer 2 over
                                                                    rawin  site x  at tim
                                                                    t of rawin soundings

                                                                    expected range of
                                                                    values, centered at
                                                                    at which actual mixe
                                                                    layer  top lies over
                                                                    rawin  site x  at
                                                                    times  t of rawin
                                                                    soundings.

                                                                    elevation (m MSL) of
                                                                    top surface of model
                                                                    Layer  3 over rawin
                                                                    station m at times t
                                                                    of rawin soundings.

                                                                    estimated water mixir
                                                                    ratio  entering cumuli
                                                                    clouds over rawin
                                                                    station m at time t
                                                                    (available at 30 mini
                                                                    intervals).
Pm(z,t)
pressure (mb) at       PI
elevation z(m MSL)
at time t over
rawin station m.
             fraction of sky       RAW
             covered by cumulus
             clouds in grid cell
             centered at x at
             time t.
                                          H.QS.,1)
                                                                    estimated  water
                                                                    mixing ratio above
                                                                    Layer 3 at rawin
                                                                    station m at time t
                                                                    (available at 30
                                                                    minute intervals).

                                                                    vertically integrated
                                                                    water mixing ratio in
                                                                    Layer 3 over rawin
                                                                    site m (units=m, see
                                                                    Eq.  8-20) at times t
                                                                    of rawin soundings.
                                        188

-------
                                 Table 8-1.   (continued)
Input
Variable
     Description
Source    Stage
                      Output
                      Variable
Description
zTCU(x,t)
elevation (m MSL)
of highest cumulus
cloud tops in grid
cell centered at x
at time t.        ~
RAW
                                             (Cont.)
                               average mixing ratio
                               in Layer 3 over rawin
                               site m at time t
                               (available at 30 min.
                               intervals).

                               elevation (m MSL) of
                               the lifting condensa-
                               tion level over sur-
                               face station n at
                               time t (required
                               only at the hours
                               t of rawin  observa-
                               tions)
w(x,z,t)
QCx.t)
horizontal wind       Stage
vector (m/sec)         WV
at site x, ele-
vation z (m MSL)
at time t.

vertical air speed    Stage
(m/sec) at site        WV
x, elevation z (m
MSL) at time t.
surface kinematic  i   P4
heat flux (m°K sec" )
in cell at x at time
           sv
t.
             fraction of sky        RAW
             covered by cumulus
             clouds in grid cell
             centered at x at
             time t.

             elevation of top      Stage
             surface of Layer 2     ZQ
             at rawin  station m.
                                             PATH
                                 path integral  of w
                                 leading to rawin
                                 site m at time t
                                 (see 8-109) units
                                 = m.

                                 path integral  of
                                 cumulus cloud cover
                                 fraction leading to
                                 rawin  site m at hour
                                 t (see 8-110) units =
                                 sec.

                                 path integral  of
                                 kinematic surface
                                 heat flux leading
                                 to site x  at time t
                                 (see 8-1H) units =
                                 m °K.
                                        189

-------
                                  Table 8-1.   (continued)

Input                                                  Output
Variable        Description        Source    Stage     Variable        Description
             average mixing ratio  Stage     WEWC      G(x ,t)      entrainment velocit;
             in Layer 3 over        ZQ                   ~          scale factor (units
             rawin  station m at                                    °K~1) (see 8-39) at
             time t (available at                                   rawin  site x  at
             30 min. intervals).                                    hourly intervals t.

             mixing ratio          Stage               wc^~mjt^     cumulus updraft
             entering cumulus       ZQ                    ~         velocity scale (m/
             clouds over site                                       sec) at rawin
             x  at time t                                           site x  at hourly
             TSvaiTable at 30 min.                                  intervals t.
             intervals).

             surface kinematic      P4
             heat flux (m °K
             sec- ) in grid
             cell at x at time t
             (at hourTy intervals).

             fractional coverage   RAW
             of cumulus clouds

             cumulus cover path    Stage
             integral              PATH

Z2(>c,t)     elevation of top      Stage
             surface of Layer 2    ZQ
             at rawin  site x
             at times t of  ~m
             rawind soundings.

z, r,(x  ,t)   lifting condensation  Stage
  LLL ~n      ievel at surface       ZQ
             weather station n
             at times t of rawin
             soundings.

T.   (t)       w path integral       Stage
  *""         leading to rawind     PATH
             site x  at time t
             of rawrn   sounding

 In  (t)       surface heat flux     Stage
  gm         path integral         PATH
             leading to site
             x  at  hour t of
             rawin  sounding.
                                         190

-------
                                  Table 8-1.   (continued)
Input
Variable
Ms(xfn,t)
Description
vertically inte-
grated water mixing
Source
Stage
ZQ
Stage
WEWC
(Cont.)
Output
Variable

Description

w(x,z,t)
ratio in Layer 3
over rawin site x
(at sounding hours t
only).

vertical air speed
(m/sec) at (x,z,t)
                      Stage
                       WV
             water mixing ratio    Stage
             above Layer 3 at       ZQ
             rawin site x  (at
             t = 30 min Tfltervals).

             elevation of top of   Stage
             Layer 3 at rawin       ZQ
             station m at sounding
             times t.

             expected range of     Stage
             z2 at rawin site       ZQ
             x  at observation
             K8ur t.
zTCU(x,t)
hourly values of      Stage
the entrainment       WEWC
velocity scale factor
at rawin site xm.
              ~m

hourly values of      Stage
the cumulus updraft   WEWC
speed (m/sec) at
site xm.
     ~m

cumulus top           RAW
elevation at hour t
in grid cell
centered at x.
             estimated top of      Stage
             Layer 2 at rawin       ZQ
             site x  at sounding
             time t.
                                              W2
                                          w (x,t) =    entrainment velocity
                                          f§/A6(x,t)   at hour t at grid eel
                                                       centered at x (m/sec)
                                                       w (x,t)      cumulus updraft speed
                                                                    (m/sec) at hour t in
                                                                    grid cell centered at
                                                                    x.
                                                       vertical air speed
                                                       (m/sec) on surface
                                                       H2 at grid cell
                                                       centered at x at hour
                                                       t.
                                          Z2(x,t)      elevation (m MSL) of
                                             ~         surface H2 (top of
                                                       Layer 2) in grid cell
                                                       centered at x at hour
                                                       t.
                                        191

-------
                                  Table 8-1.   (continued)
Input
Variable
hW
Description
mean terrain
elevation (m MSL)
in grid cell
centered at x.
Source Stage
P7 W2
(Cont.)
Output
Variable
z3(x,t)
Description
elevation (m MSL) o-
surface HS (top of
Layer 3) in grid ce'
centered at x at hoi
t.
w(x,z,t)
P.(z,t)
hi(x,t)
horizontal wind       Stage
vector (m/sec)         WV
at site x, elevation
z, time t.

vertical air speed    Stage
(m/sec) at site        WV
x, elevation z (MSL)
at time t.
pressure (mb) at       PI
elevation z (m MSL)
at hour t over rawin
station m.

depth (m) of Layer 1   P7
in grid cell centered
at x at time t.
H3(x,t)      volume flux (m/sec)
             through top surface
             Layer 3 in grid cell
             at x at hour t.
                /N/

Z2(x,t)      local time derivativ
             of elevation Z2
             (m/sec) at grid
             cell centered at x
             at hour t.

hs(x,t)      thickness (m) of
             Layer 3 at hour t
             in grid cell centere
             at x.
                **

h2(x,t)      thickness (m) of Lay
             2 at hour t in grid
             cell centered at x.
                              cv

Ps(x,t)      pressure (mb) at
             elevation of top
             of Layer 3 at hour
             t in grid cell
             centered at x.

P2(x,t)      pressure (mb) at
             elevation of top of
             Layer 2 at hour t
             in grid cell centerei
             at x.

^'(x,t)      interim estimate of
             the cumulus flux
             partition function
             (see Eq. 5-44 of
             Part 1) at hour t
             in grid cell at x
             (non-dimensionalT
                                        192

-------
                                  Table 8-1.   (continued)
Input
Variable
                Description
                      Source    Stage
                                          Output
                                          Variable
                Description
Qn(t)
On(t)
Ap,(t)
P3(x,t)
terrain elevation
(m MSL) in grid cell
centered at x.
                                    P7
                                 WV
             observed east-west     PI
             wind component (m/
             sec) at elevation
             z (m MSL) at observa-
             tion hour t at rawind
             station m.

             same as u  except      PI
             north-south wind
             component
observed east-west     P3
wind component (m/
sec) at observa-
tion hour t at sur-
face weather station
n.

same as u (t) except   P3
north-south wind
component.

surface inversion      P7
indicator (see 7-98).

elevation (m MSL) at   PI
pressure level p (mb)
at rawin  station m
at hour t.

elevation in pres-     Stage
sure coordinates (mb)  W2
of top surface of
Layer 3 in grid cell
at x at time t.
v,,(x,z,t)    horizontal wind
             vector (m/sec)
             [VM=(U,V)] at (arbitrc
             elevation z (m MSL),
             time t at site x.
                                          w(x,z,t)
                                          W[),(x,t)
<6(x,t)>3
                                                       <6(x,t)>2
<6(x,t)>1
                                                       vertical air speed
                                                       (m/sec) at (arbitrary.'
                                                       elevation z (m MSL)
                                                       at time t at site x.
                                                       divergence induced
                                                       vertical air speed
                                                       (m/sec) on top surfaa
                                                       of Layer 1 (Defined
                                                       for daytime hours
                                                       average horizontal wii
                                                       divergence (sec-1) in
                                                       Layer 3 in grid cell
                                                       centered at (x) at
                                                       hour t.

                                                       same as <6>3 except
                                                       applies to Layer 2.

                                                       Same as <6>3 except
                                                       applies to Layer I
                                                       (values of this
                                                       quantity are computed
                                                       only for daytime hour
                                                       same as <5>  except
                                                       applies to Layer 2.
                                                       same as <5>  except
                                                       applies to Layer I
                                                       (values of this
                                                       quantity are computed
                                                       only for daytime hour
P2(x,t)      same as p3 except      Stage
             elevation of top       W2
             of Layer 2.
                                        193

-------
                                  Table 8-1  (Concluded)
Input
Variable
P^x.t)
Pvs(x.,t)
Description
same as p3 except
top of Layer 1.
same as p3 except
Source Stage
P7
P7
Output
Variable

Description

-vsv~'
nvs(x,t)
             inversion
             elevation (m MSL)
             of virtual surface
             in cell at (x) at
             hour t.  Note: z
                when Ap-,
                         = 0.
                             vs
             growth rate (m/sec)
             of the radiation
             inversion layer
             depth.
                                    P7
P7
                                         194

-------
                             Appendix to Section 8
     Some of the  equations  in this Processor,  such  as (8-166), contain terms
of the form

          v-VHp                                                         (8-A1)

that must be evaluated at each grid point (I,J) of the regional model domain.
In (8-A1) both v and p are variables represented in discrete form at each grid
point of the model  region.   To fourth-order  accuracy we can represent (8-A1)
at grid point (I,J) by
                                      vI,JAy(pI,J)                      (8"A2)
          Ax(pI,J} = 3 (PI+I,J " PI-1,J} ' 12 (PI+2,J " PI-2,J}
where
and
          \i (PT i) = T (PT  1+1 " PT  1-1) " T? (PT  1+7
           y   -Ij"    -5   1,J*J.    1,J 1    LL   i,J+t
Here PT  ,  is  the value of p  at point (I,J), i.e., column I, row J, with rows
      i,j
parallel to the x axis and columns parallel to y.
                                    195

-------
YYYYYYYYYYY  YYY
                                                                                               Q.
                                                                                               •*•*
                                                                                               3
                                                                                               O
                                                                                               •o

                                                                                               03
                                                                                               +*
                                                                                               3
                                                                                               Q.
                                                                                               C

                                                                                               tn
                                                                                               +*

                                                                                               •a
                                                                                               c
                                                                                               to
                                                                                               00
                                                                                               o
                                                                                               O  v.
                                                                                               o  o
                                                                                               o  a
                                                                                               .
                                                                                               *±  0)
                                                                                               ra  o
                                                                                                   ECO
                                                                                               „ H-
                                                                                               o ^
                                                                                               OJ -E
                                                                                               CO

                                                                                               00

                                                                                               (D

                                                                                               3
                                                                                               0)
                                        196

-------
                                   SECTION 8
                                 PROCESSOR P9
DEVELOPMENT
     This processor prepares the information necessary to correct the chemical
rate  constants  for  variations  in  atmospheric  density,  temperature,  cloud
cover, and solar  zenith  angle.   Often the top  of the regional  model will lie
near the middle of the troposphere and therefore significant variations in air
density  and  temperature  can  exist  between each  of the model's  layers.   All
rate  constants  for the  intermolecular  reactions are affected  by  density and
many  are strongly  sensitive to  temperature as  well.    The photolytic  rate
constants are  affected by  the variations in solar  radiation induced by cloud
scattering and absorption,  and  by the variations in  radiation  that accompany
changes  in  the  solar zenith  angle.   We treat  the  density and  temperature
correction terms  in Stage  DEN,  and the cloud and zenith corrections in Stage
ZEN.
Stage DEN
     The easiest way to handle the effects of atmospheric density variation on
the  pollutant concentrations  is to  work  with  the  species mass  continuity
equation in its mixing ratio form.  Thus let

          Y(r,t) = c(r,t)/p(r,t)                                         (9-1)
                                    197

-------
be the mixing ratio of  a given  species, where c is the species concentration,
            _3
say,  moles m  , and p  is the  local  air density in the same units.  The mixing
ratio y is dimensionless  and  is often expressed in terms of parts per million
(ppm).   Making use of  (9-1)  in  the  species mass  continuity equation (Eq. 2-1
of Part 1) we have

          §| (w)  + V(WY) + 9z  (Ypw) = s + R" w-                     (9"2)
The mass  continuity  equation for the  atmosphere  has a  similar form, namely

          at P + YH-(pv) + §1  (Pw> = °-                                  <9'3)

Multiplying (9-3)  by -y  and subtracting the  result from (9-2) we obtain

          &+ *„•(«)+ st  103m) that  air density variations are important.
                                    198

-------
     Normalization of the emissions function S by the air density is performed
by  Processor  P10.   Here  we  are  concerned  with  the  normalization of  the
chemical reaction term R, which has the general form

          R = kcd + kjc                                                  (9-5)

where  d is  the  concentration  of  a  species  with  which the  given pollutant
                                               -1  0    -1
reacts, k is  the rate  constant (units of  mole nrsec  ) of this second-order
reaction, and k^ is the rate constant for a first-order reaction that consumes
species c.   We can write (9-5) in the form
                                                                         (9.6)
where
          Yd = d/p
is the mixing  ratio  of species d.  Substituting  (9-6)  into (9-4) we have the
equation governing  y-   In  it the second-order  rate constants  have the form
          k* = kp.                                                       (9-7)

but  the  first-order  rate constants  are  unchanged.  In  order for  the  model
equations to predict mixing  ratio,  we must supply the kinetics algorithm with
effective air  densities  for  each layer  so  that the rate  constants k can be
modified in  the  manner of (9-7).   For  this  purpose,  and also for normalizing
the  emission strengths S  in  Processor  P10,  we compute  in  this  stage average
air densities  for each of the model's  four  layers.   Concurrently, we compute
average temperatures for  each cell  and layer  for  us? within the model itself
to  make  temperature  corrections  on  the  rate constants.   The  rationale for
supplying temperature data to the model  rather than temperature corrected rate
constants  is  to avoid  any  procedure  that  would "hard  wire"   a  particular
chemical kinetics scheme into the model  or the input processor network.

-------
     Let  Tvm(z,t)  and  pn(z,t)  be  the  virtual  temperature  and  density,

respectively, at  elevation  z(MSL)  at hour t over rawin  station m, and let z

be the elevation (m MSL) of that station.  Now define



                        Sm    om

                        P.todz                                          (9-8)
                       A                                             <
                       zm



                        zm + hon, + hlm
                             hom
                             hon, + hlm + h2n,
                             hom
where
            -  1000
            ~ 2O7
                                                                      _3
is  the  factor necessary  to change  the  units of  density from  (kg m  ), the
                                                 _3
units  of Pm(z)  as supplied  by  PI, to  (moles m  ),  the units  in which the

chemical rate  constants  that we will modify are expressed.  In  (9-8) - (9-11)

h-   is  the thickness  of model  layer  j  in the grid  cell that contains  rawin

station m.
                                    200

-------
     The  integrals  on  the  right-hand  side of  Eqs.   (9-8)  -  (9-11)  can  be
evaluated by  subdividing  the  integration interval  into 50m subintervals  that
coincide with the intervals  at which TVI|)(Z)  and PmU)  are  available (from  PI).
Similarly, we define
                        (m    om    1m
                       Tvm(z)dz                                         (9-12)
                            hom
                                                                        (9-13)
                              •
                        m   "'*   3m
                       T™(z)d*                                          (9"14)
                        m + hom  +hlm *h2m
     The temperature  and density  profiles  T   and p   are available  from  PI
each  hour  but  they give  values  only  at the  measurement station sites xm.
                                                                          ~m
Therefore,   the  layer  averaged  density  and temperature  values derived  from
                                                                            _i
(9-8) -  (9-14)  must be interpolated to each grid  cell  location.   Use  the r
weighting scheme as follows:
                          _    _
                         10 I r  nm
          n = 	S^j	-	     n = 0,1,2,3               (9-15)
                              I r"1
                             m=lm
            = -^	      n = 1,2,3                 (9-16)
                  IN  n       JLJ
                             ™  -1
                             I rm
                            m=lm
                                    201

-------
where
                                          ]35.                             (9-17)
              -6
The  factor  10   in the  density equation (9-15) is  necessary  when the mixing
ratio Y  is  expressed  as  parts per million  (ppm).   The factors 

generated by this stage will pass through the B-matrix compiler (BMC) unchanged and will be used in the model to modify the second-order rate constants k in the manner described above in Eq. (9-7), namely kj = k

n (9-18) where k* is the modified rate constant in Layer n. (Keep in mind that the first-order constants are not modified by the density.) As we noted above, we assume that the second-order rate constants k are expressed in units of (moles -3 .1. _1 m ) sec . (Consistency of the concentration units throughout the model should be confirmed by comparing the parameters generated in this processor, the source strength functions provided by Processor P10, the initial concentration fields produced by Processor P2, and the rate constants contained in the chemical kinetics subroutine CHEM that operates in unison with the model.) The layer averaged temperature values given by (9-16) above also pass unmodified into the model at operation time. These data are made available there for temperature corrections to those rate constants that require it. The input-output summary of stage DEN is given in Table 9-1, and the processor is illustrated schematically in Figure 9-1. 202


-------
Stage ZEN
     All of  the photolytic  rate constants require  adjustments  for the local
solar  zenith angle     and  cloud  cover.   We  assume  following  Jones,  et al
(1981) that these "constants" can be expressed in the form

          ka= ys)H(cc)                                               (9"19)
where  k ($ )  is  the  "clear sky" photolytic rate constant for reaction a and E
       Of  o
(cc)  is  an  empirical  function of  the  cloud cover  cc =  cc(h),  which is the
fraction (0  < cc  <  1) of the  sky  covered by clouds of  height  h.   We assume
further that the clear sky constants k  are contained in the chemical kinetics
subroutine of the  regional  model code in the functional forms k  ( ) and  that
the  solar  zenith angle  <)>s  must  be supplied for  each grid  cell and hour to
evaluate them (note  that     is virtually  independent of  altitude).   Thus,
Processor,  P9, particularly Stage ZEN, must supply the following  fields to the
model by way of the model input file MIF:

            (I,J,t ) = solar zenith angle in cell (I,J) at hour t
           s      m    (units of degrees of arc);                 m       (9-20)
and
          E(I,J,t ) = cloud cover correction factor  for photolytic
                 m    rate constants in cell (I,J) at hour t             (9-21)
                      (dimensionless).

The  zenith angle <|>s  can be obtained from standard astronomical formulas given
the  latitude (JA) and longitude  (IAX) of cell  (I,J), and the date and hour tm
of the  period of interest.   The  factor  E is obtained from the formulas given
in Jones,  et al  (1981)  using  the observed cloud cover cc(h) in  cell  (I,J) at
hour t .  We will not elaborate on  the computation of s and E here.
                                    203

-------
     In summary,  the  solar  zenith  angle <|>  is used in each grid cell and hour
to determine the clear sky  rate constant k  for each photolytic reaction a.
These values are multiplied  in  turn  by the cloud cover factor H for that cell
and hour to  arrive at the corrected rate constant

          "Stf.J.V = W^'V^^'V-                          (9~22)
The photolytic  constants are not modified by the density correction terms 

-•- n generated in Stage DEN. The inputs and outputs of Stage ZEN are summarized in Table 9-1. 204


-------
              Table 9-1.   Summary of the input and output variables
                          of each stage of Processor P9 and their sources.
Input
Variable
     Description
Source    Stage
   Output
  Variable
   Description
            virtual temperature
            (°c) at elevation z
            (m MSL) at hour t.
            over rawin  station
                        PI
           DEN
0
Pm(z,tk)    same as T   except
 m    K     density (Kgm-3)
 m
elevation (m MSL)
of rawin  station m
h (I,J,t.)  thickness (m) of
            Layer 0 at time
            t.  in grid cell
 PI


 RAW


 P7
2


3
density correction
for rate constants
in Layer 0, cell
(I,J) hour t|< (units
10~6 moles nr3)

same as 

except applies to Layer 1 same as

except applies to Layer 2 same as

except applies to Layer 3 average temperature (°c) in Layer 1, ce" (1,0), hour tk (for temperature correct' of rate constants ii model) hn(I h2(I h,(I *3 ,J,t ,J,t ,J,t \(' l\ k) i<) N same Layer same Layer same Layer as 1 a-s 2 as 3 h0 U "o h0 U except except except P7 P8 P8 9 same K ^ . Layer , same K d Layer as 2 as 3 -, except J. -, except cc(x ,h,t ) fractional sky coverage of clouds of height h (low, middle, and high) at surface weather station n at hour t RAW ZEN


-------
h-
D
a.
   YYYYYYYY
   A
OJ
A
«x
V
CO
A
Q.
V
A

V
A

V
CO
A

V
                         T3
                         C
                         «3
                         S- O
                         o s
                         CO -M
                         co 
-------
                                   SECTION 9
                                 PROCESSOR P10
DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P10 transforms the emissions inventory into the source strength
          fv
functions S,  S^ and $2-  It  is  assumed that the emissions  data  have already
been structured to provide the following information:  (1) total emission rate
(moles  hr  )  of each  primary pollutant from all mobile  and minor stationary
sources  in  each of  the model's grid  cells,  at  each  hour  of  the simulation
period;  (2)  emission  rate  (moles  hr" ) of each primary pollutant each hour
for all  major point  sources; and  (3)  the physical  parameters  necessary to
determine  in  which   grid  cell  each   major  point  source lies  and what  its
effective source  height will  be under  given  meteorological  conditions.   Here
"major"  point source  refers  to any point source whose  discharge rate of  a
given  pollutant  exceeds  some  prespecified threshold.   This  processor  also
computes the plume volume fraction £ which is used in the Layer 0 equations to
parameterize subgrid scale chemistry effects.

     The three basic  tasks  involved  in  computing  the  source  strengths  are
estimating the  effective  heights of the major point sources; partitioning the
point  and  area  source emissions  among  the  three  layers  0,  1, and  2;  and
converting  the results to  units of ppm.   The  first  of these  operations is
performed in  Stage  DELH —  the  last two are  done in Stage  S.   We should add
here  that  the  units  conversion is necessary  because concentration  must be
                                    207

-------
expressed  in  ppm  in the  governing equations  in  order  to  account  for  the

variation of atmospheric density  with  elevation (see the  discussion presented

with the description  of  Processor P9).   The calculation of the parameter £ in

this processor is performed in Stage ZTA.
Stage DELH

     Suppose that  there are  a  total of  K major point sources  in  the entire

modeling  region,  and  let  the subscript  "k"  designate any  one of  them.   We

compute  the plume  rise Ahu(t )  of the  k-th  source at  hour t  as follows.
                            Ix  III                                 In



     Let  [I(k),J(k)]  be the  grid cell  (column  I,  row J)  in which  the k-th

source lies.  Then
                       0, if L[I(k),J(k),tm] < 0;
          Ahk(V =  i     F.  1/3                                        (10-1)
                       3 (-|)   ,  otherwise.
Here  L[I,J,t  ]  is the Obukhov  length  (meters)  in cell (I,J) at  hour tm>  and
                 VTak        2
          F,, = g[        3 (%)0kw. .                                      (10-2)
           K     Tk + 273      K K


In  this  expression  T.  is the exhaust temperature (°C) of the stack, Dk is the

                                                     -1                  -2
stack  diameter  (m), w.  its  exhaust  velocity  (m sec  ),  g = 9.8  m sec   is

gravity, and



                 Z_/nk Tvi/V
          T   = Jt±	                                         (10-3)
                    K|  — 0
                                    208

-------
is the estimated surface air temperature (°C) at the location of source k.   In
(10-3)
(xn,yn) is  the location of surface weather  station n and T    is  the virtual
temperature (°C) measured at that station at hour t .
     In Eq. (10-1)

                                   2
          u = [(,)
where  -.  and  ,  are  the  Layer  1  averaged wind  components  (m sec  ).
Finally, the parameter s in (10-1) is approximated by
                                                                        (10-5)
              VTak + 273)
                  2    -2 n -1
where c  =  1003  m  sec    K  .   This expression for the stability parameter s
assumes an isothermal temperature lapse rate throughout the depth of the layer
that the buoyant source emissions traverse.
     The effective height of source k at hour t  is now estimated to be
where zsk is the stack height (m) of source k.

     By virtue  of  the assumption embodied  in  (10-1)  for the case of negative
L, expression (10-6) yields effective source heights equal to the actual stack
                                    209

-------
height z   under  neutral  and unstable atmospheric conditions.   Although plume
rise does  occur  under these  conditions,  it is not particularly  important in
our regional scale  grid  model  because under these conditions  vertical  mixing
is  so  strong that  pollutants  are nearly  uniformly  spread through  the mixed
layer before horizontal transport has moved them out  of the grid cell in which
they were released.

     For example, with a  horizontal  grid size  of  18,000 m arid  a horizontal
wind speed  of 4  m sec  , material has a  residence  time of 4500 sec in a grid
cell.   The  time  scale of vertical mixing during unstable conditions is on the
order of 2h/w*.   Typical  values of the mixed layer depth h and velocity scale
w*  are  1500 and  1.5  m  sec  ,  respectively.   Hence,  vertical  mixing  is
completed  within  the time  material  is resident  in  the  cell  surrounding the
source and  consequently  the actual  height of the emission is  not significant.
(A  much more  important  factor  in   this  instance  is  the  lack  of  complete
horizontal   mixing of point  source  plumes within  a  grid  cell.   Although the
material is well  mixed   vertically,  it may occupy  a  volume  only 1  km wide
whereas the grid model  treats  the  emissions  as though  they  fill the entire
cell  uniformly.   This  discrepancy  is  a  subgrid  scale  phenomenon that the
current regional  model does not treat in Layers 1,  2 and 3.  It is potentially
a source of considerable error in the photochemical  reaction simulations that
should be considered  in future modeling applications.)

     In stable conditions,  vertical  mixing is very weak or nonexistent and in
that case point source emissions must be placed in the proper layer.

     Table  10-1   summarizes  the input  and output parameters  associated with
Stage DELH.
                                    210

-------
Stage S

     Having  estimated  the  effective  discharge  heights  of  the major  point
                                                                         *M
sources in Stage  DELH,  we can now compute the source strength functions S, S^

and $2-



     In this task we must take into account that the ground surface can extend

into Layers  1  and 2 where hills penetrate the model layer surfaces H  and H-,.

Figure 10-1 illustrates the relationships between the layer interfaces and the

terrain.     (See  Fig.  4-7 of  Part  1.   Recall  that a^  is the  fraction of

surface H-^  that  is  penetrated  by terrain, and that a-™  is  the corresponding

fraction for surface H .)
Let
                 be  the emission rate (moles h  ) of a given primary pollutant
from the  k-th major point source  at  hour tm, and let  E(I,J,t  )  be the total

emission rate (moles hour   ) of that pollutant from all other sources in grid

cell  (I,J)  at  time  t .   The  source  strength  functions  for  each  primary

pollutant have the following forms.
                                                                        H2
                                                               LAYER 2
Figure 10-1.  Illustration of the influence of terrain on model layers 0, 1 and 2
              for given values of the penetration fractions aT1 and ovn.
                                    211                       IJ-       IU

-------
                                 K
          2 = [crT1E + £ Ek Uk2]/(A2h2)                       (10-7)
                                k=l
                                       K
          1 = C(aTO-aT1)E + £ Ek ^/(A^)                 (10-8)
                                      k=l
                                  K
          S(I,J,tm) = [(l-aTO)E + £ Ek Uko]/AQ                          (10-9)
                                 k=l
where  aTQ,  aT1,  E,  h-^,  and  h2  are  functions  of (I,J,tm);  and Ek  and II.
depends on t .   The latter is defined by
          U
where
           fl, if (z. i - ZT) < H  < (Z. - ZT)
  ,(tm) =            J 1    I   -  * -   J    l                 (10-10)
  J         (_0, otherwise.
           .j = zT(I(k),J(k)).
zo =
                                  zT(I(k),J(k))
             = h1(I(k),J(k),y
             = h2(I(k),J(k),tm)
and h  is the thickness of Layer n.  Also
                                    212

-------
          A2 = A                                                       (10-11)
          A! = (1 - an)A                                              (10-12)
          AQ = (1 - aTO)A                                              (10-13)
          A  = a2(cosih)(6X)(6$)                                       (10-14)
                      o
          a  = 6,367,333 m = earth radius
          6A = l/4() = longitude grid interval
          6 = 1/6(3!^) = latitude grid interval
and <|>j  is the  latitude  of row J.   In  the evaluation of Eq.  10-9,  the total
number of major point sources lying  in Layer 0 should be  determined  in each
grid  cell  for  later  use  in  Stage  ZTA.    Let  us  denote  this  variable
     The source strength  functions  derived from (10-7) and  (10-8)  have units
            -3    -1                     ""                       -?    -1
of (moles  m   hr  ) and (10-9) gives  S  in units of  (moles  m   hr  ).   These
must be  converted to  units  of (ppm  sec  ) and (ppm  m  sec   ),  respectively.
This is done as follows:
                     =
                       ^>'tm)>n 1S  tne  average air  density (units =  10   moles  m  )  in
Layer  n,  time t   in  cell  (I,J).   Eqs.  (10-15) -  (10-17)  should  be evaluated
                                    213

-------
for each  primary  pollutant at each  hour,  level  and  grid  cell; the  results
should be recorded in the  MIF.   The  inputs  and outputs of Stage S and  their
sources and  destinations are summarized in Table 10-1.
Stage ZTA
     The  plume  volume  fraction  parameter  £(I,J)  is   used  in  the  Layer  0
equations to parameterize subgrid scale chemistry effects (see Chapters  5 and
8 of Part 1).   Here  we  use a very  simple approximation to estimate it.

     Let L(I,J) be the total  length  (m)  of  major line  sources in cell  (I,J),
let N  (I,J) be the  total number of minor point sources  in cell (I,J),  and let
N .(I,J) be  the total  number of  major point sources that lie in  Layer  0  in
cell (I,J> (from Stage  S).  Then we assume
              J-V  = tow V'V  ^"o37*                        (1(M8)
where h  is  the  depth  of  Layer 0 in cell (I,J) at  hour  t   and A is given by
(10-14).   (This is Eq.  8-7 in  Part 1.)

     Input and output information for this stage are summarized in Table 10-1,
and a schematic  illustration  of  the  relationship  among  the stages and I/O is
provided in Figure 10-2.
                                    214

-------
               Table  10-1.   Summary  of  input  and output parameters  for
                            Processor P10  and their  sources.
Input
Variable
               Description
                      Source    Stage
                                                     Output
                                                     Variable
                                                                      Description
    J,t )    Obukhov length
       m     (m) in cell  (I,J)
             at hour t
                      m
T  (t )      virtual temperature

             weather station n
             at time t .

, Layer 1 averaged
             east-west wind
             (m/sec) in cell
             (I,J), hour tffl.

, same as t except
           1 north-south
             component

Tt^m)      temperature (°C)
 K  m       of exhaust gas
            of major point
            source  k at hour

            V
D.           diameter (m) of
 K          stack k.

w. (t )      exhaust velocity
            (m/sec) of stack
            k.
                                   P4
                                   P3
                               DELH
                                                   w
                                   Pll
                                   Pll
                                   RAW
                                   RAW
                                   RAW
                                                                   effective source heighl
                                                                   (m) of k-th major poinl
                                                                    source at hour t.
                                                                                     .
[I(k),J(k)] grid cell  coordinates  RAW
            (row J,  column I) of
            major point source k.
•sk
stack height (m) of
source k
                                   RAW
E,(t ;a)    emission rate (moles/  RAW
            hr) of species a at
            time t  from major
            point source k
                                                    S(I,J,tm;a)
                                                       emission rate (ppm
                                                       m/sec) of species a
                                                       at hour t  from all
                                                       sources in Layer 0,
                                                       cell  (I,J).
                                        215

-------
                              Table 10-1.   (Continued)
Input
Variable
E(I,J,tm;a)
Description
emission rate
(moles/hr) of
Source Stage
RAW S
(Cont.)
Output
Variable
Sl(I'J'tm;a)
Description
emission rate (ppm
sec"1) of species <
            species a from all
            except major point
            sources in grid cell
            (I,J,) at hour t
                            m
o-jQ(I,J,tm) fraction (non-
         m
          dimensional) of
          model  surface H
          penetrated by
          terrain.

      t ) same as a-™ except
          applies to surface
z.(I,J)     average terrain
            elevation  (m.MSL)
            in cell (I,J).

h  (I,J,t  )  thickness  (m) of
            Layer 0 at hour
            tm in cell (I,J)

h-i(I,J,t  )  thickness  (m) of
            Layer I at time
            tm, cell (I,J).

h?(I,J,t  )  same as hn except
            alies to Laer 2.
(t )
  m
            effective  source
            height  of  major
            point source  k
•2
            mean  air  density
            (moles  m-3)  in
            Layer 2 at hour
            t  , cell  (I,J)
             same  as  

« except applies to Layer 1. P7 P7 P7 P7 P7 P8 DELH P9 P9 S2(I,J,tm;cO at hour t from all sources in Layer 1, cell (I,J). emission rate (ppm sec~l) of species a at hour t from all sources in Layer 2, cell (1,0). total number of major point sources in Laye 0, cell (I,J) at hour V 216


-------
                                     Table 10-1.  (Completed)
Input
Variable
               Description
                                  Source   Stage
                   Output
                  Variable
Description
            same as 

2 except applies to Layer 0. P9 L(I,J) total length (m) of major line sources in cell d,J) N (I,J) number of minor p point sources in cell (I,J). N .(I,J,t ) total number of J major point sources in Layer 0, cell (I,J) at hour t h (I,J,tm) depth (m) of Layer 0 m 0 in cell (I,J) at time t . RAW ZTA CCI.J.V fraction (0<£<1) of Layer 0 in cell (I,J.) filled by line and point source plume at hour t m RAW Stage S P7 217


-------
        YYYY
OD
           218

-------
                                  SECTION 10
                                 PROCESSOR Pll

SUMMARY
     Processor  Pll  generates  families  of  vertically integrated  horizontal
winds for each of the model's layers.   During daytime hours, namely times when
the  surface  heat flux  is  positive, this  processor produces  wind  fields for
each of  the  model's  three  layers.  However,  at  night  when surface inversions
exist, it provides winds for Layers 2 and 3 only.  In this case the flow field
in  Layer 1  is  generated  in Processor  P7,  and the  results are passed into
Processor Pll for amalgamation  with the wind fields derived here.
                                    219

-------
INTRODUCTION

     Previous air pollution models  have  represented the wind  fields  either by
continuous functions  fit to discrete  meteorological  data,  or by  flow fields
derived from mesoscale  meteorological  models.   In  this  study we  use neither
of these approaches.  Following  the consideration presented in  Chapters  6 and
7 of Part  1  of this report and  in  Lamb  (1983a), we use wind  observations and
physical principles  jointly  to  define  a  set or  family  of  flow  fields  each
member of which  is  a possible  description of the  flow  that: existed during the
time that  the  observations  were made.   In  the aforementioned  papers it  is
argued that  in the  case of  the atmosphere,  observations  and  physical  laws
together are inadequate  to  specify  flow patterns  to  within better than a set
of functions.  The  ability  of  so-called objective analysis  schemes  to produce
a single functional  description  of a  given  discrete   set of data  stems  from
the imposition  of  additional  constraints  that are  not  founded  in  physical
laws and which therefore lack  universal   validity.   In the  more sophisticated
of these schemes, use is  made of  empirical  data such as spatial  auto-correlation
functions of the  flow in  the  given region.   Our position  is that  this  type
of empirical information is of  great value, but its proper  role is in estimating
the probabilities of the members of  the  set  of possible  flows  that specific
observations and  physical  principles  together  define.  These members  of the
wind field  set that  have  finite probability  constitute  an  ensemble  of  wind
fields.  For a  given distribution  of pollutant  sources, there is a one-to-one
correspondence, through the equation of  species  mass  conservation and chemical
reaction, between  each  member  of  the  flow  ensemble   and  each  member   of   a
concentration ensemble.   In  other  words,  having defined the  ensemble  of  flow
fields one can  generate  the ensemble of  concentration  fields associated with  a
                                      220

-------
given emissions  distribution by  "driving"  the air pollution model  with each
member of the  flow  ensemble and recording the  outcomes.   Ensemble statistics
of the concentration can then be derived by performing averages  of the desired
quantity  over  the  ensemble set,  weighting  each  member  of the  set  by  the
probability  of  the  flow  field  from which  that  particular  concentration
distribution was derived.

     This  approach  to  pollution  modeling  is  much  more  costly  than  the
conventional  method  of  formulating  differential  equations that yield  the
desired  statistics   directly.    However,   our  approach  has  at  least  two
advantages that  in  our judgement compensate  several  fold  for the added cost.
The  first  is  that  by  deriving ensemble  properties  from  a  subset  of  the
ensemble  itself,  we  avoid  major  sources  of  error  associated  with  the
assumptions that one  must invoke to formulate a set of differential  equations
that describe  a  particular statistical  property.   In the case of modeling the
long range transport  of photochemical  pollutants, the nonlinear character and
interaction of the  processes involved  are so complex that it is very unlikely
that a  single set  of equations exist  that would yield  accurate  estimates of
even the simplest statistical properties under all conditions.

     A second  advantage of our approach is  that  it provides direct access to
all  of  the  statistical  properties  of  concentration,  such  as  the  mean,
variance,  frequency  distribution,  spectrum,  etc.,  whereas  the  conventional
method gives only  those limited properties,  usually  only  the mean,  for which
equations   have   been   hypothesized.    Following   we  describe  the  basic
mathematical steps  implemented  in this processor for deriving the ensemble of
flow fields in each of  the model's layers.
                                    221

-------
AVERAGE HORIZONTAL WINDS IN A LAYER BOUNDED BY TWO ARBITRARY PRESSURE SURFACES
     In  this  section  we develop  a general  method  for deriving  vertically
averaged  winds  in  a  given  layer.   Later we will  apply  it  to each  of  the
model's three layers to obtain the necessary horizontal  flow fields.

     As  in  Part  I  we define  the  cell  averaged  value between  two pressure
surfaces p  and pfi (p  > pR, i.e., surface a has  the lower elevation)
          u      pup
                               Pp(x',y')
                 >  =  1  ff(t(xjy'p)dpdx'4y'                         (11-1.)
                  P   Vcrp J J J
                           A  Pa(x',y')
where A denotes the rectangular domain x-|^ pfi, both  V „  and the integrals  in  (11-la)  are negative
(assuming 0).
     Suppose  that observations  of v  are available  at  N arbitrary  sites on
surface pa, i.e.,
                                    222

-------
                       ,yn,P (xn,yn,t),t)                               (11-2)
                                 n=l,2,...N.

where  (x ,y )  denotes  the  location  of observation  n.   (Throughout  this
section,  we  shall  use  the  caret  O  to  signify  observed  values  of  a
parameter.)   Suppose  further  that  we  have  measurements of  v  and  other
meteorological parameters along vertical lines between surfaces p  and pg at a
total of M locations, i.e., we have



These surface observations  and sounding sites are illustrated in Figure 11-1.
In general the number N of surface stations must equal or exceed the number of
soundings, i.e.,

          N > M.                                                        (11-4)

     Later we would  like the option of  supplementing the rather sparse upper
air  data with  estimates  of the  flow  aloft  extrapolated from  the  numerous
surface   measuring  stations.    Toward  this  end  we   define  the  function
9a(x,y,p,t) to  be  the ratio of the wind velocity at  (x,y,p,t) to the value at
(x,y,p  ,t)  where  a  is   any pressure   level.   Specifically,  we   have  gfl  =
(gua,gva) where
          n  fv v n
          gua(x,y,p,
          n  fv u n tl - V(X»y.P,t)
          gvaU,y,p,tj = V(x,y,p' t).
                                    223

-------
                                                              VERTICAL SOUNDINGS
                                                                  AT M SITES
                                        SURFACE OBSERVATIONS1
                                             AT N SITES
  Figure
                        Aoo      B^dof the Horiz
               Available on the Bottom Surface °' ] of Lajer p   °0 "" dls°
      Assunlng that g and v vary  by  only sma11  fractions of twelves as (x y)

 ranges over the area A of any grid  cell, we  get  from (11-1) and (11-5)
or
where
0 s
                         Pa -
                                      ga(x,y,p,t)dp
          p  -  vcr(xiy,t)(
                    = v(x,yspa,t),
 (11-6)
(11-7)
(11-8)
                                    224

-------
and ~ is defined as in (11-1).





     At the M  sites  of the measurements of  the  vertical  wind profile, we can
evaluate Q.  We have
          ~ P
                          « g  at each point  (x,y)  in  space by



interpolation of the "observed" values _.  That is, we assume
                                            p
                                I Wm(r)

                               m=l m ~



                                            _2

where W (r)is a weighting function, e.g., r   , to be selected later, and r is
       Ml ^                                ***                               r^


the  vector  separation  of  (x,y)  and  the  observation  site  (xm.ym)-   Using



(11-10) and  the  N  (>M)  observations v  of the wind on surface p  ,  we can ap-
                    —                ""Of                         0(


proximate the layer average winds at all those points (x ,y ), n^m, where wind



observations are available only on the surface p .  In other words, we use the



horizontally interpolated 0 function to approximate layer averaged winds at
                           - p


points where only  surface  wind observations  are  available.  Thus,  we define
                                    225

-------
where
6 is given by (11-10), and the vector product on  the  right  side  of (11-11)
is defined by
             5 (axbx>ayy
where     a = (ax,ay) and b = (bx,by).
     We will work  later  with the stream function and velocity potential  which
are  functions  of  the vorticity  and divergence,  respectively, of  the  wind
field.  The vertical component of vorticity £ is  defined by
            s k-Vxv =
i  a  5
8x 3y 8p
u  v  w
3u
3y »
(11-12)
and the horizontal divergence 6 is
              3u .  8v .
              3x   3y
(11-13)
     Since we  are  concerned  with layer averaged winds , we  must determine
how   and   are related and how <6> and  are related.   From (11-1) and
(11-12)
                           .
                        3y
                                                                       (11-14)
                                    226

-------
From Part I,  page  21, we have
                           3n        An"
                           53T  - v T#  ) +  •£ in (Vap)         (H-15a)
                                                 i   n   ..          (n-i5b)

where A  is  the horizontal area  on  which <  >  is defined; V Q is defined by
                                                            ap
(11-lb);
and
               s -i-J J —A
                               dx'dy'-
                                   227
                    A
with a similar definition of the surface average
Assumption:   On pfl, y(x,y,pa) -  and on Pp,

                   v(x,y,pp) - .                              (11-17)

-------
Note that
          £- ln(V  ) = 1H _§_        dpdx'dy'
             8x |IUV   V    8x

                                 A
                           3||r  f i  i\    /  i i 11 -i i .1 i
                      "^VR^ lUPaWy'J-p^xly')] dx'dy'
                          ap
                                 A
where the domain A is  a function of x inasmuch as A = x-Ax/2  ~ a
          3x    8x
Thus,  from this result and (11-14) we conclude that



                                (given (11-17))                    (11-21)


and similarly



                            '    (g1ven
                                  228

-------
     Using Helmholz  theorem that any  vector can  be written as the  sum  of a


rotational and a divergent component we can write
          \f — V  +
from which we have
                                      (11-23)
              = •                                            (11-24)



Since by  definition v^  is  nondivergent, we  can express  it  in terms  of the


stream function ¥:


           = JS x S*                                                (11-25)
and  since  v   is irrotational  we  can  express  it  in  terms of  the  velocity
            A

potential x:
           = Vx-
           ~X    ~
                                      (11-26)
From (11-25) we get
< V =
and from (11-26)
                  !  j  5

                  001
                  = |X i + |X
           ~X    9x ~   3y
Combining (11-24), (11-27), and (11-28) we get
                                      (11-27)
                                      (11-28)
                                                                      (ll-29a)
                                    229

-------
           = §3! + §* + v                                             (ll-29b)
                8x   3y

where  u  and v  are the  average  values of   and   over the entire  model
region and are known functions of time only.

     Differentiating  these  expressions in the manner  of (11-21), (11-22),  we
get
                                                                       (ll-30a)
              = V2x-                                                   (ll-30b)
We seek the functional forms of ¥ and x that are consistent both with  physical
laws  and  with our  observations OB,n=l...N  (see  Equation  11-11).
(We assume that the wind observations are error free.)

     Our observation  set  might represent a time  period in the past for  which
we  would  like  to  determine  the  origin  of pollutants  responsible  for  an
episode; or  it might represent so-called worst-case  meteorological conditions
for which we wish to test a control strategy; or so  on.

     We will consider only two of the physical laws  as  constraints  on  the flow
fields that we consider, the momentum law and the mass  conservation principle.
In pressure coordinates these are expressed, respectively, by
            9~ + (v-Vu)v + u>8~ +  fk x  v =  ~ V
-------
where u> is the "vertical velocity" in pressure coordinates, i.e.,
            = If + 2* V + w If                                        (11-33)
*  is  the  geopotential  height,  f  the  Coriolis  parameter,  K  the  "eddy
viscosity", FM  represents the  viscous  source  of  negative momentum,  and v =
(u,v) as  before.   Expanding  (11-31) into its two components and using (11-13)
we get
                                          2     2
  9u * ..9u j. w9u *  9u    f<  -   3*   . ,/r3 u  . 3 un  . c
  9t + ^x + V3y + %  ' fV - " 3*  + KC2 +      + FHx
                         6 = - 9ui/3p                                   (11-36)
     It is  useful  to convert (11-34) and (11-35) into the vorticity equation,
partly  as  a means  of eliminating  explicit dependence  of  the velocity on *.
Guided  by  (11-12)  we differentiate (11-35) with respect to x  and  (11-34) with
respect to y and then subtract the two equations to get
            r3uj 3v   3uj 8u,   ,, r32C  . 32£n A 9FHy - 8FHx,
            L3x 3p   3y 3pJ   " l^2   9y2J  '  3x     3y
                                                                        (11-37)
                                    231

-------
     The equation  governing <6>  is  found by averaging (11-36)  in  the manner
of (11-1):
          <5> = -          gdpdx'dy'                                  (11-38)

                            K
                         > (x;y') - u>s(x;y')]dx'dy'                      (11-39)
where u>a denotes u)(x;y',pa).   Using (11-16) we can  write  (11-39) in the final
form
          <6> = §   0*- J#].                                           (11-40)
Later when we apply (11-40) we will describe approximations of io*, etc.





     Turning next to  the  vorticity equation (11-37) and the derivation of the



equation  governing   ,  we see  that  under assumption  (11-17) we  can write
           ^,  ^  - 0.             (under assumption 11-17)            (11-41)
          op  dp





This  permits the term  in brackets  in  (11-37) to  be neglected.   (This term



represents the  generation  of £ by the  rotation of  horizontal  vorticity.)  We


                               3f /
will also omit the "beta" term    9y in (11-37).   With these approximations we



can write (11-37) in the simplier form
                                    232

-------
                                             = K _
                                                  O \i    5iv/
                                                  \J *\    O y


                                                                      (11-42)
                                                           3y ^
where we have used the  approximation (see Haltiner 1971, page 151)
          FH = -  g                                                    (11-43)
and i is the shear stress.



     Averaging (11-42)  in the  manner of  (11-1)  we  generate the  following

terms, expressed  following the analyses of Part I:
                 §1 *>  +  <> si  ln(V
                                                                      (11-44)
                     3             3
                    3x            3x     (Kp
                                                                      (11-45)
                                .   ~ap
                                v
                                ap
                                V
                                    233

-------
          <       =
                32t
The terms like < — *> are quite complex and we will  approximate them simply by
             2        2
                > -  -2<£>                                            (11-48)
            9x       3x

Combining all the above and assuming <£6> = <£><6>,  we get
               = - f<6> +                      u
                          Vap   t      dt     ~H  ~                    (11-49)
                   aB
where
                                        3^
                                    + KC
                                                                       (11-50)
                                                                       (11-51)
          Pa = P^
and

          al 5 si

In  deriving (11-49)  we assumed  that  i_  =  0  on pQ  in anticipation  of the
                                        ~z           p
eventual  use  of this equation  in  applications  where the upper  surface pg is
above the friction layer.  We will  use Haltiner's approximation (page 152) for
i , namely
                                    234

-------
where pn is air density in layer ot.p, in particular the mixed layer; CD is the
drag coefficient and    is the layer averaged  wind  vector given by (11-51).

     It is convenient to  group the terms in (11-49) according to whether they
represent  sources  or sinks of <£>.   The terms involving £' do  not fall  into
either  category,  but for now we will  combine them with the  source terms and
write (11-49) in the form
af
where
                af
                                     3x
                                                      3y
                                                                       (11-55)
               3
H s - f<6> +
             "
                        06
              3^
                                                                       (11-57)
                                                                       (11-58)
     We  are  now ready to  collect  the equations that we will  use to generate
the  ¥ and x  fields.   First,  let  the  superscript  denote the  time variable,
i.e.,
                                    235

-------
            +  —<£>   +  <£>  G
                                   3x           9y         »

                                                                        (11-60)



                   a2   a2       11
                  f_ + d  i <•/->" - ur
                  L—o^ —oJ ^s,^  ~ n
Let 4  be the complex Fourier transform of <£>  ,  i.e.,
                      00
   i    i
<>J = -
                                   dkdk
                 471
                     -co
                oo
               f (*        -ik*x

               J J <^(x)>Je  ~ ~ dxdy
               -03
where k = (k ,k) and x = (x,y).  We will  represent transform pairs by





          4J ~ °,                                                   (11-62)




and will make use of the convolution theorem
                             00
                                                                        dl-63)

                      (2n)
                            -00
where x and k are 2-D and
          f(x) «. F(k).
                                     236

-------
Note from (ll-61a) that
                           00

                      i  rr   i    ^'X
                      i  rr,. ,j,,.^    dk dk                          (11_64)
                          -co
                      7  1  I *Y* vt'c    dMkv>                       (11-65)
                     4^  ii  *            x  y

                          -00
and in general






          ~<£>J ^ dk ) 4                                           (11-66)

          3xn           x







Now, replacing each term in (11-60) by its Fourier transform and making use of



(11-63) and (11-66) we get





                               09
                              -oo
              oo
             -CD
                                                                       (11-67)
                   00
                     J(k')GJ(k-k')dk'dk' = 4/tV
                    ^ XA^ '  xys/ ** '  XV
                  -oo
                                    237

-------
where
          GJ *-» GJ                                                      (ll-68a)
          HJ ~ HJ                                                      (ll-68b)
          UJ «-» J                                                    (ll-69a)
          l/J «-» J                                                    (ll-69b)

     We want equations  for 4* and x-   Thus, we obtain from (ll-30a)  and (11-66)
                                                                         (11-70)
where

          H
-------
The transforms U   and  V   of the  velocity  components   and   can now be
expressed in the form (see 11-29)

          UJ = -ik AJ + ikxBJ + uJ6(k)                                (ll-73a)
where
             =  ikAJ + ik S° + vJ6(k)                                (ll-73b)
                  x       y
          X°(x) «-> BJ(k)                                              (11-73C)
and  6(k)  is  the  delta function  of  the  wave  number  vector  k.   Then from
(ll-30b), (11-40), and (11-66) we find that 8J must satisfy
where
                   kx+ky
                   <6> = - - [^"(x.JAt) - ui (x.JAt)]                 (11-75)
                                    ~
and ID is considered to be a known variable.


     Finally,  the  observations QB given  by  (11-11) must be  satisfied.
Hence, from (11-29), (ll-61a), (11-66), and (11-11) we have
            00
           -00
                                              n=l,2...N;
                                    239

-------
           00
     —2   CkxAJ(k) + kvBJ(jc)]e~  n dk =  „ - v(JAt)
     (2n) JJ             y
           y                                                           (11-77)
          -OB
                                                  n=l,2...N

where xn =  (xn,y  )  are the observation sites described above,  and u and v are
the averaged observed winds in the entire model  domain at time t = JAt.
     Equations (11-72, 74,  76  and 77) comprise a  set  of 2N + 2 relationships
that  the  transforms A and  B,  or  equivalently   and  ,  must  satisfy.   A
fundamental  difference  between  this  system  of equations  and  the  system
currently used in  meteorological  modeling is the presence of the 2N equations
(11-76,  77)  associated  with  the wind  observations  made  at  time JAt.   In
conventional meteorological models,  the  observed data are transformed through
ad  hoc  means into a description  of  an initial velocity  field;  and using it,
the two equations  (11-72  and  74) are  solved  as  an initial  value problem.  As
we  shall   discuss  below,  this  practice  is  not supportable  on  scientific
grounds,  and when  it is  employed,   the velocity field  that one  obtains  is
largely an  artifact  of  the ad hoc procedure  that was  used in the formulation
of the initial state.

     The fact  is  that the N observations  of  the  wind velocity at any instant
JAt,  say,  do not  uniquely determine the velocity distribution at that moment.
Rather,  these  measurements,   specifically  (11-76,   77), together with  the
continuity  equation  (11-74) define  a hyperpiane  in  the phase  space of wind
velocity.   Each  point  on  this  plane  represents an  entire vector  function
[u(x,JAt),  v(x,JAt)], xeD.  We pointed out in Section 6 of Part 1 that each of
                                    240

-------
these functions  in a possible  description of the actual  velocity  field that
existed at  the moment  t=JAt  that the observations contained  in  Eqs.  (11-76)
and (11-77) were made.   If we had to choose from this set of possible velocity
functions the  one  that  we thought described the flow that actually existed at
the moment  the observations  were made, our choice would be guided by whatever
previous wind data we had seen for the region in question and on our knowledge
of the nature of atmospheric motion generally.  On this basis we would declare
many of the possible functions to be "unlikely" descriptions because they have
characteristics  that are incompatible with our knowledge.   For example, even
though  all  functions in  the  set satisfy the  observations  and the continuity
equation  (11-74)  exactly,  some contain  hurricane  force  winds between  the
observation  stations;   some  contain  intense  vortices  and jets;  and so  on.
However,  even  after all  these  are  dismissed,   there  remains  a  virtually
infinite  set of functions  no one  of which can  be  ruled  out as a plausible
description of the actual flow.

     This  suggests  that we should  assign to each point  on the hyperplane of
possible  flow descriptions a weight  p,  say, whose magnitude  is  a  measure of
our  conviction that that  particular  function  is  the  one  that describes the
flow  field that existed  when the  observations  were made  (at time JAt).   To
those bizarre  functions mentioned above, we would assign the  weight p=0; and
to the  remainder of the points  on  the  hyperplane of possible descriptions we
would assign weights l>p>0.  Without going into details, we point out that the
weight  p  is synonymous  with the "probability" of occurrence of the flow field
to which the p is assigned (see  Lamb, 1983c).
                                    241

-------
     The  problem  is  to  formulate  a  quantitative  rule  for  assigning  the
weights.   Clearly,  we  cannot examine  every  function  on the  hyperplane  of
possible  flows  and assign  it a  weight subjectively.  We  need  a  mathematical
procedure.

     In Lamb  (1983c)  several  approaches to this problem are  proposed.   It is
shown in  that paper  that in  effect the method that has been employed to date
in both diffusion and  meteorological  modeling studies  has  been  to  assign a
zero value of p  to  all of  the  possible  flows  except one and to assign the
value p=l to that single  function.   This is  equivalent to declaring that we
know the  correct description  of the  flow  field  at  t=JAt without any doubt.
This "correct"  description is obtained using one  of the  so-called objective
analysis  formulas.   But many  such  formulas  exist — no formula  of this type
can  be  universally valid  ~  and therefore  it is  illogical  to label  any one
description of the flow the "correct" description.  The point is that there is
no scientific basis whatever for assigning unit weight to only one function in
the set of possible flows and zero weights to all  others.

     One  rational method   of assigning  p  is the  following.    It  has  been
theorized  that  in 2-D fluids kinetic energy  is partitioned  among the spatial
                                               _o
fluctuations  in  the  flow in  proportion to | k|  , where k is the wave number
vector  of the  fluctuation.   To  a  large  extent  this theory is  supported by
measurements  of  kinetic energy in the free atmosphere.  Thus, let Q represent
the manifold  in  velocity phase space of  functions  whose Fourier  transform is
                                                              _ ^
consistent  with  an  energy  spectrum  of  the  form  E(k) ~ | k |   .   And  let Q
represent  the manifold  formed by the  intersection  of Q and  the hyperplane of
possible  flow descriptions.  We now advance the hypothesis:
                                    242

-------
                              q(v), if v sQ;
          p(v(x,JAt),xeD) =                                           (ll-78a)
                     ~        0   , otherwise
where l>q(v)>0  is  a  function of the  entire  velocity  field v(x,JAt), xeD that
we have  yet to specify.   Hypothesis  (ll-78a)  is simply a statement  of  our a
priori belief that the description of the true velocity field at time JAt is a
member of  the  subset ft of the  hyperplane  of possible flows.  Observations of
the  flow  field at  times  following  JAt  and  observations  of  the rate  of
dispersion  of  material  in the flow might force us a posteriori to reject this
hypothesis.

     To supplement (ll-78a) we might advance the following hypothesis:

          q(v) ~ E(v)"1                                               (ll-78b)

where E  is  the kinetic energy of  the flow field v integrated over the entire
model  domain  D.   In  practice one  can  treat only  a finite  number of  the
velocity fields contained in Q.   For example,  in  accordance with (ll-78b) we
might select,  say,  the 20 members of Q that contain the least kinetic energy,
namely the  20 points in fi closest to the origin of the phase space; and assign
p values to each  using (ll-78b) and the constraint that the sum of the 20 p's
be unity.

     In  hypothesis  (ll-78a,b),  and  in  the  conventional  approach  discussed
earlier, consideration is given  only to the  observations made  at the single
time  JAt.   However,  observations made  after  JAt provide  valuable information
that  can be used by way  of  the momentum equation  (11-72) to  obtain a better
approximation  of  the  probabilities  p  of  the flow fields at  JAt than we can
                                    243

-------
obtain  from empirical-theoretical  considerations  alone.   To implement  this
approach requires rather complicated  dynamic  programming procedures.   We  plan
to utilize this method in the "second generation"  regional  model.

     For the present  we  shall  replace Eq.  (11-72)  with the much  simpler,   and
much weaker, diagnostic constraint

          dx = C(t)                                            (11-79)
        D

where C(t)  is  the  circulation  around the perimeter of  the modeling region D.
This equation  is a  statement of Gauss' theorem.  We will  derive estimates of
C(t)from observed winds and treat it as a known function of time.

     We  see  from   (ll-30a)  that  Eq.  11-79  is a  constraint on the  stream
function, and  hence  on  A (See  11-71).   Substituting (ll-30a)  into (11-79) and
making use  of  (11-71) and  Stoke1s theorem,  we can express (11-79) in terms of
the transform  of the stream function:
              f f        ik L      ik L     k2   k2
          -M   A(k)[(e  x x-l)(e  y y-D(  XkV  )ldk dk  = c(t)      (11-80)
          4^JJ                             KxKy      x  y
Thus, the initial  version  of processor Pll will be  based on  the equation set
                              =>AJ(k),BJ(k)
                                    244

-------
Each  solution  set [A(k),  o(k)] derived from  (11-81) yields  layer averaged
winds  [,  ] through the following  equations,  whose origin
is (11-29):
                             oo
                                                   ik-x
           = _i-^\[-kyAJ(k) + kxBJ(jk)]e   "dk + u(JAt)    (11.82a)
                            -08
                            00
           = -     [k A(k) + k vB(k)]e~ ~dk + v(JAt)
                      (2n)z    x
                           -oo
In  the first  generation  model  we  will  derive between  ten and  twenty flow
fields  from (11-81,  82)  for each  hour of  the  model simulation  period  and
assign  weights  p to  each using  hypothesis  (11-78)  above.   Let  us  call this
finite  ensemble  of flow  fields  at  hour  t=JAt W .    (We  should  add  that even
though  the  members  of W  are not explicitly related to those of W , K^J, due
to  our replacing  the  momentum  equation  (11-72)  with the  simple diagnostic
expression  (11-79), there is implicit coupling of these ensembles by virtue of
the fact that each of them is defined in terms of the actual winds observed at
each  hour.) We  generate a corresponding  finite ensemble C of concentrations
(containing M=10 to 20 members) associated with a given emissions distribution
S(x,t), xsD,  0 <  t<  T,  by "driving" the  dispersion  model  with  M wind fields
[, ]  , xeD,  J=0,l,. . . JMAV, u=l,...M.   Each  of the M flow
    ~           ~       (J  ~               nnft
fields  is   created by selecting  a  and a   at random from
the ensembles ^  for  each hour J=1,...JMAX  in the period of interest.  Either
ensemble mean  values   of  the concentration  or the  frequency  distribution of
concentration  or  any  other  statistical quantity of  interest can be computed
                                    245

-------
directly  from  the  ensemble  C  for  any  desired  receptor  sites and  times.
Details will  be presented  in  a future  report.   (See also  Lamb 1983 a,b,c).

     Below we outline  the  basic structure of Processor Pll which utilizes the
techniques described above  to  compute the layer averaged  winds  .  for each
of the regional  model's three layers.  Winds are determined for Layers 2 and 3
at all  hours  and in Layer 1 during  the  day only.   The nighttime air flow in
Layer 1 is simulated in Processor P7 and passed into Processor Pll in the form
(VL,VL) for amalgamation with the flow fields computed here.
                                    246

-------
STAGE UV11

     This stage computes  layer  averages  of the measured winds  aloft that are
used as  the observations  in  solving  Eq.  (11-76) and  (11-77).  Consider  first
the calculations required for Layer 3.

(1)  At  each  of the M  upper  air weather stations compute the  layer averaged
     horizontal wind components as follows:

                                 P2(xm,t)         ~~}   m=l,2,...M
                                                       mode 0 and
                                                                       (11-83)
                                                       mode 1
                           ^pl
                           3  2
where  u  and v are the measured  wind  profiles.   Since the input winds  (u,  v)
are in z coordinates, it will be necessary to transform them to p coordinates,
e.g., u(x ,p,t), using the pressure-height function p (z,t).
        ~ro                                           m
(2)  Since the  bottom  surface of Layer 2  is  p    in mode 1 and  p^ in mode 0,
     the corresponding expression for the Layer 2 observed winds is
                                    247

-------
                             pl J
                                  PB(xm,t)
                                   8  m
                                                                       (11-84)
                                  p0(x ,t)         V   mode 0 and
                                   t. ~m            f
                                   v(xm,P,t)dp
                                      m
where
                    ~Pvs(x,t) ,    mode 1;
          PB(x,t) =|                                                   (11-85)
                      P1(x,t) ,     mode 0.
(Recall that mode 1 applies when Ap,=l, and mode 0 applies when Ap-,=0.)

(3)  Processor Pll  is  not  used  in Layer  1  during mode 1 conditions.  In that
     case  the flow field  in Layer  1 is  generated  in  P7.   During mode  0
     conditions,   the  depth  of  Layer  1  is  set  in  P7  to  a  value  that  is
     approximately  the top  of the shear layer.   Assuming, then, that the flow
     speed and direction in Layer 1 are roughly uniform we adopt the following
     expressions for OB -,:
          OB , = u(x  t)   -v
              n    OB»1      n          n=l,2,...N
          OB,l = KZn'
mode 0 only
                                                                       (11-86)
     where  x ,  n=l,...N  are the  sites  of the  N surface  weather stations.
            ~n

(4)  Optional.  In order  to  supplement the sparse upper air data on which the
     observations in  Layers  2 and 3 are based, we define the following "shear
     functions" for  use  in  estimating the flow in Layer 2  over surface wind
     stations.
                                    248

-------
                  2    u(x  p  (x_,t;,t;
                       ~m  uc~m            '     BFI....M
                                                                      (11-87)
                                                 mode 0 only
In mode 0, pvg  coincides with  the  ground surface  and hence the function
is  the  ratio of  the measured  vertically averaged  wind  in  layer  2 to  the
observed wind at ground  level.

     Next we  interpolate values  of 2 and 2 at each of  the  N surface
stations  from  the values  given by  (11-87)  for  the  rawin station  sites  as
follows:
                         M
                           '  ""-	2	—                            (11-88)
where
              J  = C(x-o2 +  (y.-yJ2]"1-                            (ii-89)
A  similar  operation  yields o-   We  can now define  pseudo  Layer  2  winds
over each surface station  as  follows
                        =  20(xn,t)     ^^
                                                mode'6'only.          (11-90)
                                         ,t)     optional
This optional  method of supplementing the upper air data can be implemented as
desired.

                                    249

-------
Stage PHLOB

     This portion of  Processor  Pll  solves  the equation set  (11-81)  to obtain
members of the  flow  field ensemble.   When a  surface  inversion  is not present
(mode  0),  this  stage computes  averaged winds  for all  three  layers  of  the
model.   Otherwise (Mode  1)  simulations  are  performed only for layers 2 and 3,
and the corresponding Layer 1 flow is assigned the values

                = v,    1
                 1       VL    I   mode 1
               1 = VL   J

where  v^  and VL  are the  wind components  in  the cold inversion layer
generated  by  Processor   P7  at  each  grid  cell  and at  each  hour  that  the
inversion (mode 1) exists.
     The input  requirements  of  Processor Pll are summarized in Table 11-1 and
its outputs  are listed in Table 11-2.   Processor  Pll  and its interfaces with
the processor network are illustrated in Figure 11-2.
                                    250

-------
              Table 11-1  Input Requirements of Processor Pll and
                          Their Sources
     Variable                    Description                       Source


p^(x,t)                  top surface of Layer 3 in pressure           P8
                           (mb) coordinates

P2(x,t)                  same as above, except top of Layer 2         P8

PycQ^t)                 pressure (mb) at the virtual                 P7
                           surface

Pi(x,t)                  top surface of Layer 1 in pressure           P7
                           (mb) coordinates

u(>e,z,t)                observed east-west wind speed component      PI
                           (m/sec) at rawin  station m(=l,...M)
                           at hour t at elevation z(m MSL)

v(x ,z,t)                same as above, except north-south            PI
                           wind component

u(x ,t)                  observed east-west wind component            P3
                           (m/sec) at surface station
                           n(=l,...N) at hour t

v(x ,t)                  same as above, except north-south            P3
                           wind component

p (z,t)                  pressure (mb) at elevation z                 PI
 m
                           (m MSL) over rawin  station
                           m(=l,...M) at hour t.
<6(x,t)>3                average-,horizontal wind divergence           P8
                           (sec  ) in Layer 3 in grid cell
                           centered at x at hour t.

<6(x,t)>2-               Same as <6>3 except applies to Layer 2       P8

<6(x,t)>-.                Same as above except applies to Layer 1      P8

y.                Average east-west wind component in          P7
                           Layer 1 during mode 0 (generally night-
                           time) hours (m/sec)

y.                  Same as above except north-south wind      P7
                           component
                                    251

-------
                     Table 11-2  Outputs  of Processor Pll
     Variable                           Description


3                Vertically averaged wind (m/sec)  in Layer 3 at
                           grid cell  centered at x at hour t (east-west
                           component)


3                same as above,  except north-south wind component


2                Vertically averaged wind (m/sec)  in Layer 2 at grid
                           cell centered at x at hour t (east-west component)


2                same as above,  except north-south wind component


.                Layer 1 averaged wind (m/sec) in  grid cell centered
                           at x at hour t (east-west component)


,                same as above,  except north-south wind component
                                    252

-------
                                       T
        YYYYYY
                                   (B 

< *? ? 0) w 9 i 8 c ^ O (D c 2 w o a £ *•• ® fe S? JE o •fc ** w w j= c 3 ** S 0) 3 O) V v 253


-------
                                  SECTION 11
                                 PROCESSOR P12

DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P12 calculates  parameter  fields  required in the description of
interfacial material  fluxes between Layer  0  and Layer 1 and  between  Layer 1
and Layer  2.   It also provides estimates of the horizontal  eddy diffusivities
in all  layers.   The  mathematical  expressions for  the parameters we  require
were  presented  in  Part  1  of  this  report.    Below  we  provide  detailed
descriptions of the implementation of these expressions and further commentary
on their meanings and origin.   The discussion is divided by stages just as the
calculations within P12 are divided.
Stage K
     This  stage  computes   estimates   of  the  horizontal  eddy  diffusivity
K (I,J,t ) at  each  grid point (I,J) at each  hour  t ,  for each of the model's
three layers n = 1, 2, and  3.   Here  eddy diffusivity refers to the action of
the small scale wind fluctuations generally associated with turbulence.  These
include wind fluctuations  generated by wind shear  at  the earth's surface and
across  the  top  of the  mixed  layer, and lateral  fluctuations  induced  by
convective  thermals,  principally  at  the  top  of the  mixed  layer and  at the
ground.    (The   effects  of  small  scale vertical  fluctuations are  handled by
parameters like ft'-,  that we consider later.)
                                    254

-------
     It is important  to  keep in mind the  role  that the eddy diffusivity will
play in  the  regional model.   In conventional  studies,  the magnitude  of the
horizontal diffusivity  controls the  rate  at which a plume  expands  about its
"centerline"   and   this   in   turn   affects  the   magnitude   of   the  "mean"
concentration  that  the  model  predicts.    In  the present  model  the  eddy
diffusivity plays a lesser role.  As we discussed in Part 1, Chapter 7,  and in
the description  of Processor  Pll  in this  report,  the regional model will  be
applied to simulation of the ensemb1e averaged  concentration.   This requires
the model to  be  run a number of times, each time using a different flow field
[n,   n]  from  the  ensemble  of  flow  fields  described in  Processor Pll
following (11-77)  but using the  same eddy diffusivity K   in  each case.   The
results of all the individual  simulations are eventually superposed to arrive
at  the  ensemble  averaged  concentration  properties.  In  the  case  of a point
source  plume,  the  superposition of the  individual  realizations  within the
ensemble might appear as shown in Figure 12-1.  Note that K  controls the rate
of  expansion  of  the plume in each realization, but the spatial variability of
the wind  fields  within  the flow ensemble  are what govern the envelope of the
superposed results  and  hence it is  these  larger scale  variations in the flow
that dominate the  ensemble mean concentration.   In this  case  it can be shown
that K  affects the mean square concentration.  This in turn affects the rates
of  second-order chemical reactions and also the expected deviation of the mean
concentration the model predicts from the actual concentration values that one
might measure.

     Another way of viewing the role of the eddy diffusivity in the regional
model   is  to  consider  that  between  the  largest  turbulent  fluctuations
represented   by  the  diffusivity  K and   the  smallest   perturbations  in the
                                    255

-------
subsynoptic flow  that our  network  of wind sensors can  resolve,  there lies  a

range of  "mesoscale" wind  fluctuations  that are not  accounted for either  in

the  K's  or in the  "transport  flow".   And it is  these fluctuations that  give

the ensemble averaged plume the width I illustrated in Figure 12-1.
                                                         ENVELOPE OF ENSEMBLE

                                                           AVERAGE PLUME (2)

                             CENTERLINE OF ENSEMBLE  PLUME WIDTH (o).

                                 AVERAGE PLUME _  CONTROLLED BY
                                                s

                                CENTERLINE OF PLUME

                                 IN ONE REALIZATION
  Figure 12-1.  Illustration of the  superposition  of  five hypothetical
                realizations of an ensemble  of point  source plumes.   The
                width I of the ensemble  of plumes  is  controlled by the
                character of the  flow  field  ensemble.   The width a of the
                plumes in the ensemble is controlled  by the turbulent,  eddy
                diffusivity K.


     On  the  basis  of  the  points  raised  above,  we  expect  that  the  values

assigned  to Kn  in the  regional  model  will  directly  affect  the mean  square

concentration values more than the mean.  However, they may have a significant

indirect effect on  the mean concentration through  the influence that they will

have  on  photochemical   reaction  rates.   We can  only   determine through test
                                     256

-------
calcuations just  how large these  effects  can be.   For now we  will  postulate
simple forms  for the  lateral  diffusivities  K   that we can use  in  the first
generation model.
     Lacking a firm  basis  on which to estimate  the  eddy diffusivity, we will
use heuristic arguments to formulate expressions for K .   Our first assumption
is  that the  lateral  eddy  diffusivity  is  effectively zero  during nighttime
hours  when  convection  is  absent  and/or stable  stratification damps  shear
generated  velocity   fluctuations.   Our second assumption  is that  during the
day, convection  is  the primary source of horizontal  wind fluctuations.  Let D
be the  horizontal scale of convective cells, or rolls, and let H be the depth
of  air in  which the  convection is  confined (usually  by  a stable  layer an
elevation  H above  the  ground).   We  will  base  our parameterization  on the
concept that convective circulations  have a toroidal shape with rising motion
along the axis of the toroid, outward horizontal motion along the top, sinking
motion  along  the outer  surface of the  toroid,  and  horizontal  motion at its
bottom directed in toward the axis.   In this picture the outer diameter of the
toroid  is  D and  its height is H.  If the circulation were indeed this simple,
then a particle would receive a horizontal displacement of order D in the time
At  required for  the  particle  to  traverse the depth  H of  the circulation.

     We imagine that each convection toroid is surrounded by others and that a
particle in any one toroid can escape into an adjacent one during the time the
particle  is moving  downward along the  outer edges  of  the  toroid  or during
times  when the convective  cell is dying.   If  these  migrations of particles
from one cell to another occur at random, then as a rough approximation we can
treat  them as a  classical  random  walk  process.  In  this  case the effective
                                    257

-------
diffusivity K is

          K ~ D2/At.                                                     (12-1)

(Incidentally, the random walk  and the gradient transfer,  or K theory, models
of diffusion are essentially equivalent.)

     It has been found in empirical studies of dry convection in the planetary
boundary layer that D ~ 1.5H.   If we represent the transit time At by

          At = H/W,                                                     (12-2)

where W  is  a characteristic velocity scale of  the  convective motion, then we
get from (12-1) and (12-2)

          K ~ WH                                                        (12-3)

which we could  have  guessed at the outset  on  purely dimensional grounds.   In
dry convection W = w*, where

          w* = (HQg/e)1/3                                               (12-4)

where Q is the kinematic heat flux at the ground and 6 is the mean temperature
in the mixed layer.   When cumulus clouds are  present  (moist convection),  the
appropriate  measures  of W and  H  are  unknown.   In this  initial  work we shall
assume that when convective clouds are present
          W = wc

where w  is the average upward air speed within clouds and

          H = H2 + H3                                                   (12-5)
                                    258

-------
where H^ is  the  depth of the convective  layer  below cloud base and HO is the
depth  of  the  layer  occupied by  clouds.   These estimates  will  be  tested  in
future studies.

     Based on  the  considerations presented above, we  propose  the expressions
summarized  in  Table  12-1  for  the  diffusivities  K   in  each  of  the  model's
layers.
Horizontal
Diffusivity
Ki(i»J>V
K2(i,j,tm)
K3(i,j,tm)
uu,y
>0 <0 and <0 and
ac = 0 ac * 0
0 .lw*H2 .lw*H2
0 .lw*H2 .lwc(H2+H3)
0 0 .lwc(H2+H3)
    Table  12-1  Summary  of the expressions  used to  estimate  the horizontal
                eddy  diffusivity  K   in each  of  the model's  three  layers.
                                    259

-------
The relationships between  H2  and H3 and the thickness h  of the model layers,
which are inputs to P12, are as follows:

          H2 = hl * h2                                                 (12-6a)
          H3 = h3 .                                                     (12-6b)

In Table  12-1,  a  is the fraction  of  the  sky covered by cumulus  clouds in a
given  grid  cell at  a given  hour.   The velocity  wc(i,j,tm) required  in the
expressions  for K  is an  input  parameter  to processor P12; and w* should be
computed by

          w* = (H2Qg/00)1/3                                             (12-7)

where hL  is  given  by (12-6a); Q is the surface heat flux, an input parameter;
g  =  9.8m  sec  ; and  0   is  the  surface   temperature  interpolated  from the
surface  virtual temperature  measurements   T    as  follows   (compare  with Eq.
7-108)

                        *r »— *—TT  /i "\ _»
                          n=l "
where
          rn = [(iAx-xn)2 + (jAy-yn)2]%                                 (12-9)

and  (x  ,y )  are  the coordinates of surface  weather station n.  The values of
w* obtained from (12-7) will be needed again in stage WW1 below.
     The  input  and  output  requirements  of Stage  K are  summarzied  in Table
12-2.
                                    260

-------
Stage WWO
     Here we calculate  parameters  A.+ ,  w+, w_ and u associated with turbulence
phenomena in Layer 0 and on the surface H  that separates Layers 0 and 1.   The
definitions of these parameters were developed in Part 1.
     First we compute the vertical velocity variance on surface H :
where
                     Of,
                         mj
                           2/3
          4 =
(12-10)
(12-11)
                    -164)"4  , if 4 < 0;
                             , if 4 > 0
                                                                       (12-12)
                "0.4 [0.4 + 0.6exp(4|)],  if | < 0;
                _0.4 [1.0 + 3.44 - 0.254*],  if 4 > 0.
                                                                       (12-13)
and  u*  is the  friction velocity.   In  Eqs.  (12-10)  -  (12-12),  the variables
a  , u*, and | are all functions of (i,j,t ).
     Next we approximate the time derivative of h  by
                                                      -i
(12-14)
where At =  3600 sec is the  time  interval  at which hQ  and other variables in
the processor network are available.
                                    261

-------
     With these preliminary variables computed at each grid point and hour t ,
we can now calculate the following output parameters (see Eqs.  8-10, 8-12, and
8-13 of Part 1).
where erf is defind by
                       X  ,2
          erf(x) = -£  fe"X d\.                                         (12-16)
                   -Jn J
                                                       n               (12-17,

where a^Q) given by (12-10), and h ,  given by (12-14),  are functions of
          w.(i,j,tm) = n0(i,j,y + w+(1fj,tB)                         (12-18)

          v(i,j,tm) = u*(i,j,tm)                                       (12-19)
The parameter  v is the  entrainment velocity of ambient air  into  plumes from
surface  emissions  and is discussed in detail  in  Chapters  5 and 8  of  Part 1.

     At  this point it is advantageous to determine  the  values of the cumulus
flux partition  parameter  ¥  defined in Part 1, Eq. 5-44.   Interim values ¥' of
this parameter  were  developed in Processor P8, but  we  must test whether they
satisfy  criterion  (5-47) of Part 1, namely
                                    262

-------
              w+A+(l-aTO)
          V <    j v—                                                (12-20)
                  v* c
where w+ and \+ are the  parameters  that we just computed in (12-17) and 12-15)
above, and where
                 w9-w
          Vc = - -jr^ -  fQ/A6                                         (12-21)

(see Eq. 5-45  of  Part 1).   All  of the variables  in (12-20, 21) are functions
of  space  and time and  each of them,  except w+ and \+,  is  an  input to this
processor.   Consult Table 12-2  for definitions.

     To obtain the  final  values  of  4* for  output  to the model,  proceed as
follows.  First,  at  each grid  point  (i,j)  and  at  each  hour t  compute the
variable V(i,j,tm)  defined  by  (12-21) using  the  input  fields  w2(i,j,t ),
W-O'.j.t ),  etc.  Next,  compute
          f (i j t ) -                                                (12.22)
          *(1J'V        oc(l,J.t,)vc(i,J,tB)                       (1222)
where w+ and X+ are from (12-17)  and (12-15)  and VjQ  and a  are inputs to this
processor.  Finally, we have
          ni,j,tm) = min{«{"(i,j,tm)r'(i,j,tm)}                       (12-23)
where V  is the interim estimate of f that  is  input from processor P8.  The
values of Y should be recorded in the model  input  file MIF.  This parameter is
also required in the next stage of this processor.
                                    263

-------
     Parameter summaries for Stage WWO are given in Table 12-2.
Stage WW1
     This stage computes  the  parameters W   w, , and w^,  (defined in Part 1,
Chapter  4)  that  are associated with  material fluxes  across surface  H,.  To
compute  these  quantities we  must  first define several  auxiliary parameters.
                   m
) = vertical velocity at level  z, during neutral and
    unstable conditions (input from P8)

      0.6w*(i,j,y  if L(i,j,tm) < 0;
                                                   (12-24)
      0 ,  if L(1,j,tJ > 0
where                                                                  (12-25)
where  At =  3600  sec  is  the time  interval at  which  h-,  and hQ  values are
available.
     Let w  be the solution of the following transcendental equation:
                             2   —              —
                                 W«T        W - W.
                                                                       (12-26)
                                    264

-------
where erf(x) is  defined  by (12-16),  V is from  (12-23),  etc.   (Note  that , cr  , w  ,  0,., and hence w  are all  functions of (i,j)  and tm).   Now  let
          w(i,j,t)=w'(i,j,t) -   O'J''
R1
mD1
                                 m
At each grid point (i,j) and each hour t  compute
                                                    (12-27)
                      erf(-
                                                        if
                                                 wl
                             iJ.    ,  if L(i,j,tm) > 0;
                                                                       (12-28)

                               Jwl
                                   exp t
                                          'wl
                                W
                                 R1
                                             , if L(i,j,tm)<0
                                           ,
                                          wl
                          nvs(i,J,tm) , if L(i,j,
                                                                       (12-29)
                         'WniOJ.tJ , if L(1,j,tJ < 0;
                                                    0.
                                                                       (12-30)
                                    265

-------
     To evaluate the  function  erf in (12-28 and 12-29)  in the limit as a ,
0, the following procedure should be used.
          if a , = 0, erf (— — ) = SIGN(A)-1                          (12-31)
This condition should be encountered only rarely since a , =; 0 when L > 0 (see
Eq. 12-24)  and in  this  case W-, and  W-,M have the forms  given  in  (12-28) and
(12-29) that do not involve the error function.

     The  input and output  requirements  of Stage WW1 are summarized  in Table
12-2.    The  processor and  its  interfaces  with  the processor  network  are
illustrated in Figure 12-2.
                                    266

-------
                    Table 12-2  Input and output variables of each
                                stage of Processor P12.
Input
Variable
V'-J'V
h2(i,j,y
Description
thickness (m) of
Layer 1 in cell
(i,j) at hour tm
thickness (m) of
Layer 2
Source
P7
P8
Output
Stage Variable
K ICjd .J.V
K2(i,j,tm)
Description
horizontal eddy
diffusivity (m/sec)
in Layer 1, cell (i,
hour t
same as K, except
Layer 2
h-a(i»J»O
 J      m
thickness (m) of
Layer 3
                                    P8
                                                              ,_
                                                                m
                        same as K, except
                        Layer 3  i
              fraction (0
-------
                                    Table 12-2 (Continued)
 Input
Variable
                Description
Source    Stage
                                                         Output
                                                        Variable
                                     Description
              Obukhov length (m)
              in cell (i,j) at
              hour t

                                    P4
            WWO
          (cont.)
                                                                      average speed (m/s
                                                                      of fluid moving uf
                                                                      relative to surfa(
              thickness (m)
              of Layer 0 in
              cell (i,j) at
              hour t
                                     P7
                                   same as w+ except
                                   speed of downward
                                   moving fluid
                                                                      entrainment veloc
                                                                      (m/sec) of plumes
                                                                      in Layer 0
               fraction (0
-------
                                    Table 12.2 (Concluded)
 Input
Variable
            Description
                                  Source
          Stage
                                             Output
                                            Variable
 Description
vertical velocity
(m/sec) on
surface H-, in
neutral and
unstable conditions
                                    P8
                                             WW1
                    w-i(i>j»t )
vertical velocity
parameter (m/sec)
on surface H,

vertical velocity
parameter (m/sec)
on surface H,
w*(i,j,t )    convective velocity   Stage K
        m
              scale (m/sec)
                                                                      vertical velocity
                                                                      (m/sec) on surface
                                                                      H, due to horizontal
                                                                      divergence in the
                                                                      flow field.
              thickness (m) of      P7
              Layer 1 at (U,tffl)

             thickness (m) of       P7
             Layer 0
L(iJ,t )
«Ki»j»t )
  (i,j,t )
             Obukhov length
             scale (m) in cell
             (i,j), hour t
                          ffl
             cumulus flux
             partition function
             (dimensionless)
             fraction (0<0 <
             of sky covered by
             cumulus clouds in
             cell (i ,j) at hour
P4
Stage
WWO
RAW
w (i,j,t )   cumulus updraft
             velocity scale
             (m/sec)

crT1(i,j,t )  fraction (0J> V
             cold layer
             rate (m/sec)
                                    P7
                                        269

-------
YYYYYYYYYYY
VV v V
        \J7
       270

-------
                                  SECTION 12
                                 PROCESSOR P15
DEVELOPMENT
     Processor P15 computes deposition resistances r and deposition velocities
P for those  pollutant  species for which  empirical  data are available.   These
parameters are related  through  the friction velocity u*, which  is a function
of local wind speed.   To avoid coupling this processor to processor Pll, which
computes the flow fields, we will use friction velocity estimates based on the
"raw" surface  wind  observations, namely those  generated  by  P3, which  are
available in the PIF.  These "raw" values constrain the magnitudes of the wind
velocities  generated  by  Processor   Pll;  consequently,  any  inconsistencies
between deposition velocity  estimates based on the u* values derived from the
raw data  and those  implied by the output of Pll are most likely much smaller
than the  level  of uncertainty in the empirical  relationship  between (3 and u*
that we employ here.
Step 1
     Compute deposition  resistances  for each pollutant species.  In this task
we  must  adopt a numbering  convention  for the pollutants.  In  Part  1 of this
report, we  initiated  the convention that species  NO  is  pollutant "1"; N02 is
pollutant  "2";  and  03  is pollutant  "3".   Beyond  this the  numbering  is
unspecified and  one  is free to select whatever system is convenient.  In this
                                    271

-------
Processor description we will  refer to all  pollutants other than NO, NCL, and
Oo by their  names  and leave the assignment  of numbers to them as a task to be
performed during the implementation phase of this work.

     The deposition  resistance r(x,t;a)  (sec/m)  for species a  averaged over
the NEROS grid cell centered at x at hour t  is assumed to be

                     10              10
          r(x,t;a) = I T(x,n)rn(a,L)/I T(x,n)                           (15-1)
                    n=l             n=l
where rn(a,L)  is  the deposition resistance  of species  a over land use type n
during atmospheric conditions characterized  by Obukhov length L at hour t.  In
Tables 15-1,  2, and 3 we  list the r  values currently  available for several
pollutants.
       Table 15-1.  Deposition resistances (sec/m) for S02 as a function
                    of land use type n and stability L
                        (From Sheih, et al., 1979)
          n=            L<0          L = «           L>0
1
2
3
4

5
6
7
8
9
10

900
100
100
100

100
100
0
0
70
100

900
300
300
300

300
300
0
0
250
300
272
103
3 — >
J
103
3 I
3 (
103 |
103
	 X
0
0
800
103


!

)» use 0.0 if
L > 0 and
RUM> 0.9
1 **
\






-------
The surface  relative humidity  RH(x,t)  in each cell can  be  interpolated from
the surface station values RH  available from P3 using a weighting scheme like
that employed in Eq.  12-8.
      Table 15-2.   Deposition resistances (sec/m) for ozone as a function
                   of land use type n and stability L.
                            (From Wesely, 1981)

           n=           L<0          L=»          L>0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7 lake
ocean
8
9
10
300
70
150
60
150
70
3
0.0
100
100
400
200
200
300
400
300
2.103
0.0
250
200
400
400
300
1.5-
1.5-
1.5-
2.1
0.
300
350



103
103
103
.3
0


     Resistances for other  pollutant  species are not available in the current
literature.   Deposition  velocities  for several pollutants other  than S02 and
03 onto "vegetation" were  reported by Hill and Chamberlain in 1975 (see Table
6 of McMahon and  Dem*son (1979)), but these pertain to only one land use type
and  moreover,   the  associated  atmospheric  stability  conditions  were  not
specified.  Lacking any  other source  of data, we  propose  to use the Hill and
Chamberlain data to estimate the resistances of each  species relative to 03,
                                    273

-------
and subsequently  to use that estimate and  the  values given in Table  12-2  to
deduce crude estimates  of  resistances.   From the Hill and Chamberlain data  we
estimate that  the difference A^Ca)  between the resistance of species  a and
that of ozone over agricultural  land (n=2) (under unknown conditions of L) are
as follows.
 Table 15-3  Deposition resistances of several  pollutants relative to that of
             ozone over agricultural land.   (Deduced from data of Hill and
             Chamberlain, 1971)
          Species             Ar2 [=r2(03)-r2(a)](sec/m)
°3
so2
CO
NO
PAN
N02
0
+25
<-105
-940
-100
+ 7
If  we  assume  that  these  values  apply  for  L<0,  then  we  can  estimate
r2(PAN,L<0), for example, to be
          r2(PAN,L<0) = r2(3,L<0)-Ar2(PAN)
                      =  70 + 100
                      = 170 sec/m.
One  conflict that is readily  apparent  with  this method is  that  the value of
r2(S02,  L<0) deduced from Table  12-3  does  not agree with  the  value given in
Table  12-1.    This   discrepancy is  indicative of  the   wide  scatter in  the
                                    274

-------
reported deposition rates  of  the various species.   In the interim, we propose
that approximate values of rn(a,L) be derived from the Ar2 method above.   That
is, we assume

          r2(a,L<0) = r2(3,L<0)-Ar2(a)                                  (15-2)
for  species  a  =  CO,  NO, N02  and PAN.   The  values  for  the other  land use
categories n=l,3,4...10  and other  L values can  be taken as  having  the same
ratio to the n=2, L<0 values as those given above for ozone.

     The output  of Step  2 should be deposition resistances r(x,a) (sec/m) for
species a=03, S02,  CO,  NO, N02 and  PAN for each cell x of the NEROS grid for
each hour of the simulation period.  These values are used in the next Step to
compute deposition velocities.
Step 2
     Compute the  average  deposition velocity p(x,t;a) (m s  ) of each species
a in each  NEROS grid cell at hour t using the following expression from Sheih
et al.  (1979):
          P(x,t;cr) = 0.4u*[ln(z/zJ+ 2.6 + 0.4u*r(x,t;a) - ^f1        (15-3)
where u* is  the friction velocity (m s  ) in the cell centered at x at hour t
(from P4); ZQ  is  the effective surface roughness (m) for this cell (from P4);
z is  the elevation at which  the  concentration of species a  is  taken for the
purpose of estimating the deposition flux from p (we will use

          z = h Az  - 10m                                               (15-4)
                                    275

-------
see Part I,  Eq.  5-6b);  and the function 41  is  given  by (Sheih et al.,  1979)
                   {0.598 + 0.3901n (-  /L)  -  0.090[ln(-VL)r},  if  L<0;  (15-5)
              - 5z/L,  if L>0;

where L  is  the  Obukhov length  (m) for the cell  centered at  x at hour t (from
P4).

     The  inputs  and outputs of each step  of Processor P15 are  summarized  in
Table 15-1;  and the processor  and its interfaces with the  processor network
are illustrated in Figure 15-1.
                                    276

-------
                Table 15-1  Summary of the input and output parameters
                            of each Step of Processor P15.
Input
Parameter
               Description
Source    Step
Output
Parameter
Description
T(x,n)
RHn(t)
Ux,t)
          fraction of NEROS cell      RAW
          centered at x in land
          use type n, n=l,2,...10.
          (dimensionless)
          relative humidity          P3
          (dimensionless) at
          surface weather station
          n at hour t.

          Obukhov length (m) in      P4
          cell centered at x at
          time t.
                    r(x,t;a)  effective deposition
                              resistance (sec/m) of
                              cell centered at x
                              to deposition of species
                              a=0,, NO, N0~, etc.  at
                              hour t.     *
          surface roughness          P4
          (m) of cell  centered
          at x.
u*(x,t)   friction velocity          P4
          (m/sec) in cell  at x
          at hour t.

L(x,t)    Obukhov length (m) in      P4
          cell  at x at hour t.

r(x,t;«)  deposition resistance      Step 1
          (see Step 1 output).
                                                       P(x,t;a)  effective deposition
                                                                 velocity (m/sec) of
                                                                 species a=03, NO, N02,
                                                                 etc., in ceil centered
                                                                 at x at hour t. Reference
                                                                 level z=10m)
                                        277

-------
            I
             X
                                       w £
                                       .ti -C
                                       (0 -|

                                       Ifl >
                                       r— 
                                       (O 3 O

                                       111
                                       U)



                                       £
                                       3
                                       OJ
V V  V V
         278

-------
                                  SECTION 13
                            THE B-MATRIX COMPILER

INTRODUCTION
     The  b-matrix  compiler  (BMC)  translates the  variables  generated by  the
network of processors  into  the elements of the  "b-matrix" defined in Part 1,
Section 9,  and  into the variables  required in  the transport  and  diffusion
terms of  the  "r-equation,"  also defined in Part  1,  Section  9.   The interface
between the BMC and the processor network is the model input  file (MIF).   This
is illustrated schematically in Figure 1-1.

     The  mathematical  relationships  among the MIF variables  and the b-matrix
elements  were  summarized in Appendix  C of  Part 1.   A  complicating  aspect of
these  relationships  is  that  the  values of  a  small  group  of  the b-matrix
elements  are  dependent on  the local  ozone concentration, which is  not  known
until during  execution  of the  model.   Fortunately, all of the matrix elements
in this group  can  have only one of two predeterminable values,  depending upon
the local  value of the function IL which is defined as follows:

                 ,  if     ^'                                   (16-1)
           0
                O, otherwise
where ?N« is the local emission rate of NO in Layer 0 and
                                                                        (16-2)
                                    279

-------
Thus, the  BMC  must provide to the model  both  of the possible values  of  each
b-matrix element that  is  concentration dependent.   The appropriate  value can
then be selected during execution of the model  based on the local  value of IL.
In  the  next  section we  present the  expressions  for each  of   the  b-matrix
elements in terms  of the  MIF variables.   (Definitions of  each variable can be
found in Table 13-1 at the end of this  section.)
THE B-MATRIX ELEMENTS
Let
                           " (1'aTi)(ft/i+V
* =
6  = w_A. - w+\+(l-|)(l-a)Q
                                                                        (16-4)
Ozone (03)
bn=
-------
Nitric oxide (NO)
             .}  9lNO ' % <°3>1' 1f U0 =


                     , if UQ = 0.
where



          „*   - cNO
Nitrogen dioxide
          .      ,    NO,                N00
          b!2 = K
          b13 = 0                                                      (16-11)
                                      N0                               (16-13)




          **- = 1 '  1f Uo = l>
          g  = i   1NU2    N02  d 1       o

           1      a**     U  = 0
                 91N02 ' Uo   U'
                                    281

-------
where
                  N02    (l-aTO)(l-cQ
         91NO, = Sl     r h, (pwn + u)  UJNO                             (16-18)
             C            -L   llUn



                  N02    (l-aTn)(l-o)u  _
          **   = c  ^
          *i kin  "™ ^T
                                   'Dl;
          g1NO s 	Lii	 «%Q0                                     (16-20)
           1NU2   h1ONQ + u)     U3
species x  (excluding 03, NO and



          b   =       + fi  +  1-
          b!2 = E^-OlAm

          b,, =~0                                                       (16-23)
all species


                                                                        (16-25)
          b22 = H [
           u   n2
          h   _    1  /,    >  f8                                          (16-27)
          D23 ~ " ~h7U"CTcJ  A8
                    ^                                                   (16-28)
                      UI/T  fw —w  ^
                      ~|J/,V."0 ™rJ    ffl
                    +   CiJ  C +  S  d-a. + a.f)]                     (16-26)
                                     282

-------
Ozone (Q3)
                   31
                                                                       (16-29)
b,9 = r (l-f)M

 *<•   n3
      1 ,
1%   —   / •• I f » LI
DOO — 7- I M*n.
 jo   rU
                  i*  = i H U C°3   if U
                     - K "-J0-?^13 > ' '  u,
                    3   3
                                                     = 0.
                                                                       (16-30)






                                                                       (16-31)
                                                                       (16-32)
Nitric oxide (NO)
          h   -
          b31 -
          b33 - y-
                                   '  if
                       '  if
where
                          NO
            3NO
                                                             (16-33)






                                                             (16-34)






                                                             (16-35)








                                                             (16-36)
                                                                        (16-37)
                                     283

-------
Nitrogen dioxide (N09)
where

                         NO
                                    284
                      13                                               (16-39)
           3NO " h(3
          b   = —£- + l~^                                  (16"40)
          b3? = K (I'^M                                               (16-41)
           Ot.   ''0                                x



          b33 = H (" M+ |!|3U3)                                          (16-42)



                             cO^,,  if U  =1;
                               J -1      °                              (16-43)
                                      9
                           2            ]                              (16-44)
               =      U-  --    MO    NOO]                  (16-45)

-------
species x (excluding 0-,  NO and N02)
where
          «.-!
                 0,  if H, < 0.
          b31 =

          b32 = H(1~'1')M                                              (16-48)
          b33 = J [-M+ H3U3]                                          (16-49)
                 1,  if H3 >  0;
          U  = 
-------
Consequently,  the basic  equation 2-29  of  Part  1  must be  cast  in  a  form

compatible with (16-54).  The  only  terms in (2-29) that  are  involved  in this

transformation are
     _3
     3t
                           3
                      31 nV
                                    3.
                                   Vv>j
                                             81 nV
                                                                       (16-55)

                          = a   are metric  factors  and a is  the radius  of
where u, =  (a cos ..   In  Section 7  of Part  1,  we
                                             J

proposed to express the fluxes ., etc.  associated with the subgrid scale
                                     J

fluctations in the gradient transfer form (see Eq. 7-2, Part 1)
          . = -K.
                          8.
                           8\
                                                                 (16-56a)
                          3 .
                                                                      (16-56b)
where the  K.  are diffusivities specified in Stage K of processor P12.  Making
            J

use of (16-56) in (16-55) we get
3.
3K,  3,
                            31 nV.
                            31 nV.      3K.  3.
                            	J _ ..2 	JT 	J
                             55>K     "<*> 3A J  JJA
                                    286

-------
                   2             2
                  3  .        3 •  •
                  —    "      —    =
This equation  is of the  form  (16-54)  required by the  algorithm  in the model
that handles  the advection  and diffusion processes  (see Appendix  A of P7).
Two  basic  operations  are now  necessary to  complete  the preparation  of the
equation  for   numerical   solution:   (1)   to   convert  the  units   of  all
parameters  —  the  model   treats  the  equations  in  (A.,)  space  rather than
physical  space  (x,y);   (2)  to convert  the  effective  advection velocities,
i.e.,  the  terms in  brackets   in  (16-57),  into coordinates  (\*,*)  of the
upstream trajectories associated with each grid point in the model domain (see
Figure 7-A1 of P7).   Below we outline the details of specific operations that
are required.
Step 1
    . Four parameter fields are involved in these operations:  the two velocity
components  .   and  .,  the  diffusivites  K.;  and the  cell  volumes  V..
               J          J                      J                           J
Values  of  each of these are  available  in MIF for  each  layer  j=l,2,3 and for
each  grid  cell  in  the  model domain.   All  data in the MIF  are  in mks units.
                                                 -1                  2 ~1
This means  that  the units of  and  are m*s   ; K has units of m s  ; and
                 3
V has  units of m .   The first task is to convert all length units from meters
to radians.
     This  is  accomplished  using the  metric  factors  u,   and  u^  which are
measures of the arc angles in radians of longitude and  latitude, respectively,
per  unit length  on the  earth's  surface.   Thus,  for example,  I-V^.-  is the
east-west component of wind  speed in radians (of longitude)  per  second.

-------
     Let  (I,J)  denote  (column,  row) of  any cell  in  the model  domain.   The
metric factor u,. varies with J, namely

          ux(J) = (a cos ^j)"1                                         (16-58)

where 4>j  is the  latitude in radians of  row J, but u,  is  a constant, namely

          Mf = a"1                                                     (16-59)

where a is the earth's radius:

          a = 6,367,333. meters                                        (16-60)

Now  convert  the velocity  and diffusivity  fields  obtained  from  the MIF  into
their  corresponding values  in (A.,(j>)  space for  each  layer  j=l,2,3 and  grid
point (I,J) as follows:

                                J)>.j,                                  (16-61)

                                j,                                     (16-62)

                   = [HX(I,J)J2K..(I,J),                                (16-63)

                                                                       (16~64)
          Kyj(I'J)
The K*.  and  K* .  fields should be  recorded  directly in the output file of the
     ^j       yj
BMC for input  into the model.
Step 2
     Take the natural log of each cell volume V. in each layer at each grid
                                               \j
                                    288

-------
point to produce arrays of (InV.).  For each layer j compute estimates of
                               j
 g

g-^ InV. at every grid point (I,J) as follows
          ^ lnV.(I,J) - DXLV(I,J,j) =


                                                                       (16-65)
where



          6\ = k (^=fi) = model grid interval in \.
On the western boundary where 1=1, use





          DXLV(I,J,j) = [ln(Vj(2,J))-ln(VJ.(l,J))]/6\               .    (16-66)





and on the eastern boundary



          DXLV(IMAX,J,j) = [ln(VJ.(IMAX,J))-ln(VjdMAX-l,J))]/6\        (16-67)





In the same manner define



          at InV-(I.J) - DYLV(I,J,j) = [ln(V.(I,J+l))                  n(. cfi>
          O

= 1/6 (•o^) = grid interval in <}>. (16-69) On the south and north boundaries, where J=l and JMAX, respectively, use approximations similar to (16-66) and (16-67) for DYLV(I,J,j). Step3 Form approximations of the derivatives of K*. and K*. as follows: DXKX(I,J,j) =[K*.(I+1,J)-K*.(I-1, (16-70) 289


-------
          9KJi
          gjU- = DYKY(I,J,j)  = [KJj(I,J+l)-K*j(I,J-l)]/(26(t))
Use approximations similar to  (16-66)  and (16-67)  to  treat grid  points  on  the
boundaries.
Step 4
     Form  the  effective  advection  velocity  components,  i.e.,  the terms  in
brackets in (16-57) as follows.
          ueff(I,J,j) = * -  KJj.d.
                         - DXKX(I,J,j)                                  (16-71)
          veff(I,J,j) = J -  K*.jd,J)*DYLVd,J,j)                (16-72)
                         - DYKYd.J.j)
Values of  u ., and  v  - ,  must be computed  for each layer j=l,2,3; each  grid
point in the model  domain; and each  time step  At (= 30  min.).
Step 5
     Compute the  "back track" points  associated with each grid point  (I,J),
each layer j=l,2,3, and each time step.   This  is  done as  follows:

          Let ueff (I.J.j.N), veff(I,J,j,N) denote the
effective velocity components  ,  (16-71)  and (16-72), at  time  step  N,  i.e.,  at
time  t=t  +NAt.   Consider a  given  grid cell  (I,J,j) at  a given time step  N.
Compute
                                    290

-------
          Ml = "ueff (I.J.J.N)AT                                       (16-73)
          A4>1 = "veff d.J.J.N)AT                                       (16-74)
where AT = At/n, say AT = At/3 = 10 minutes.   These  increments  define  a point
(A.,) in (X,<5>) space, namely
                                                                         (16-75)
     Fit a  biquintic  polynomial to the  (ueff,  v *f) values at  time  step  N on
the 36-grid-point square centered at the cell nearest  (A.,, <)>,).    Note that the
polynomial  must  be  in terms of (\,) rather than  (x,y).  With this polynomial
and  a  linear  interpolation  in time  between  NAt and  (N-l)At, estimate  the
values of (ueff, veff) at- the point (A.-^,^) at  time NAt-AT  , i.e.,
          U
       - AT), Vef fO^pj, NAt-AT).
                                                   (16-76)
C"V
           eff    ..
Now compute the new point
          \9 = X, + [-u_ff (A,,,,j,NAt-AT)AT]
           1    L      eft   1  1
                       eff (^1»<()1»J»NAt-AT)AT].

Using  the biquintic  space  approximation and  the  linear time  interpolation
again to estimate u ~ and v -f at  (A^, (fp. NAt-2At),  compute  finally

          (A*=) \RT. = LAMBT(I,J,j,N) = \? +  [-uoff(\?,<)>?, j,NAt-2AT)AT]
                 BTj                      2      eft   Z  2               (16-77)
          (
-------
     The  diffusivity  fields  K*.  and  K*.  should also  be  recorded on  the
b-matrix tape for all I,J,j and all  times steps N=1,...NMAX.

     The b-matrix  compiler is  illustrated in Figure  BMC-1,  and each  of the
variables in the MIF is defined in Table BMC-1.
                                    292

-------
INPUT

(MIF)
BMC
   OUTPUT

("b-matrix" tape)
                                                  Ml!
                                                  CD ^ W

                                                  IK-J=
                                                  .2 «> o

                                                  Hi-
                                                  •g at2
                                                  «£.S 2,
                                                  « S E S
                                                  5s^l

                                                  •*• x: "® m

                                                  5 w 5 O
                                                  o — w O

                                                  S So «

                                                  ^r^ °
                                                  3 O CO O
                                                  = ^ 
                                                  C/> »- O XI
                                                  m

                                                  £
                                                  3
                                                  O)
                      293

-------
                Table BMC-1.  Definitions of parameters in the
                             Model  Input File (MIF).
Parameter
                    Definition
JTO
o
 Tl
w,
w
                    Thickness of model  layer n,  n=l,2,3.
                    Average east-west wind component in model  layer n=l,2,3.
                    Average north-south wind component in model layer n=l,2,3.
                    Horizontal eddy diffusivity in model  layer n=l,2,3.
Fraction of the top surface of Layer 0 penetrated by
terrain in a given grid cell.
Fraction of the top surface of Layer 1 penetrated by
terrain in a given grid cell.
                    Fraction of sky covered by cumulus clouds in a given cell.
                    Plume entrainment velocity in Layer 0.
                    Fraction of Layer 0 occupied by line and point source plumes.
                    Deposition velocity of pollutant species X.
                    Fraction of the top surface of Layer 0 covered by ascending
                    fluid.
Mean speed of upward moving fluid on top surface of Layer 0.


Mean speed of descending fluid on top surface of Layer 0.


Composite vertical turbulence parameter on top surface of
Layer 1.
                                    294

-------
                           Table BMC-1. (continued)
Parameter
                                   Definition
'Ira
WD1



"2


"c

fe/Ae
 x

 X
 1

 X
 2

 x
 oo
                    Composite vertical turbulence parameter on top surface
                    of Layer 1.
                    Mean vertical air velocity on top surface of Layer 1
                    induced by flow divergence in Layer 1.
                    Mean vertical air velocity on top surface of Layer 2.
                    Cumulus updraft velocity scale.
                    Turbulent entrainment velocity at mixed layer top.
                    Fraction of cumulus cloud volume flux drawn from Layer 0.
                    Local time rate of change of the elevation of the top
                    of Layer 2.
                    Volume flux across top of Layer 3.
                    Emission rate of surface sources of pollutant x.
                    Emission rate of sources of pollutant x in Layer 1.
                    Emission rate of sources of pollutant x in Layer 2.
                    Concentration of species x in air above the top of model
                    Layer 3.
                                    295

-------
                                  REFERENCES


Artoz, M.  A.  and J.  C.  Andre,  (1980): "Similarity Studies  of Entrainment in
     Convective  Mixed  Layer",   Boundary Layer Meteor.,   Vol.   19,  pp  51-66.

Brost, R. and J. C.  Wyngaard, (1978):  "A Model Study of the Stably Stratified
     Planetary Boundary Layer",  J. Atmos. Sci., Vol. 35,  pp 1427-1440.

Bullock, 0. R. (1983): "Spatial  and Temporal Interpolation of NEROS Radiosonde
     Winds",  M.S.  Thesis,  Dept.  of Marine,  Earth and  Atmospheric Sciences,
     N.C. State University, 105 pages.

Demerjian, K.  L., (1983): personal communication.

Demerjian, K.  L. and K. L Schere (1979): "Applications of a Photochemical Box
     Model  for Ozone  Air  Quality in  Houston, Texas".   Proceedings,  Ozone/
     Oxidants:  Interactions  with  the Total  Environment II, Houston, TX, 14-17
     Oct. 1979, APCA, Pittsburgh, PA, pp 329-352.

Godowitch,  J.  M.  and  J.  K.  S.  Ching (1980):   "Formation and  Growth  of the
     Nocturnal  Inversion  Layer  at an Urban and  Rural  Location", Proc.  Second
     AMS  Joint  Conference  on Applications  of  Air Pollution Meteorology, New
     Orleans, LA, pp 165-172.

Golder,  D.,  (1972):   "Relations  Among  Stability  Parameters  in  the Surface
     Layer", Boundary Layer Meteor.. Vol. 3, pp 47-58.

Haltiner,  G.  J., (1971):   Numerical Weather  Prediction,  John  Wiley and Sons,
     New York, NY.  317 pages.

Hill, A. C. and E. M. Chamberlain, (1976): "The Removal of Water Soluble Gases
     from  the Atmosphere by  Vegetation", Proc. Symp. on Atmosphere - Surface
     Exchange  of  Particles  and  Gases, ERDA  Symp.  Series,  NTIS,  pp 153-170.

Holtslag,  A.  A.  M.  and A.  P. Van Ulden,  (1983):   "A Simple Scheme  for Daytime
     Estimates  of the Surface  Fluxes  from  Routine Weather Data", J. Climate
     and Applied Meteor.. Vol. 22, pp 517-529.

Jones,  F.  L.,  R. W.  Miksad  and  A.  R.  Laird, (1981):   "A Simple Method for
     Estimating  the  Influence  of  Cloud Cover  on  the  N0?  Photolysis   Rate
     Constant", J. Air Poll. Cont. Assoc., Vol. 31, pp 42-45.

Lamb,  R.  G.,  (1983a):   "Air Pollution  Models as Descriptors  of Cause-Effect
     Relationships", Atmos. Envir.,  (in press).

Lamb,  R.  G.,  (1983b):   "Theoretical Issues in Long Range Transport Modeling",
     Preprint Volume, AMS Sixth Symposium on Turlulence and Diffusion, Boston,
     Mass., pp  241-244.

Lamb,  R.  G.  (1983c):   "Causality and Atmospheric  Phenomena" (in preparation).
                                    296

-------
Lamb, R. G.  (1983d):   "A Regional Scale  (1000  km) Model of Photochemical Air
     Pollution. Part 1: Theoretical Formulation", EPA report EPA-600/3-83-035.
     226 + xi pages.  NTIS-PB83-207688.

McMahon, R.  A.  and P.  J. Denison, (1979):   "Empirical  Atmospheric Deposition
     Parameters - A Survey", Atmos. Environ., Vol. 13, pp 571-585.

Melgarejo, J.  W.   and  J.  W. Deardorff, (1974):   "Stability Functions for the
     Boundary-Layer  Resistance   Laws  Based   Upon  Observed  Boundary-Layer
     Heights", J.  Atmos. Sci., Vol. 31, pp 1324-1333.

Nieuwstadt, F. T.  M. and H. Tennekes, (1981):  "A Rate Equation for the
     Nocturnal Boundary-Layer  Height",  J.  Atmos.  Sci..  Vol. 38, pp 1418-1428.

Sheih, C. M., M. L. Wesely  and B. B.  Hicks,  (1979):  "Estimated Dry Deposition
     Velocities  of  Sulfur Over the  Eastern United  States  and Surrounding
     Regions", Atmos. Envir., Vol. 13, pp 1361-1368.

Wesley,  M.  L., (1981):   "Turbulent  transport of  ozone  to  surfaces common  in
     the    eastern    half    of   the    United    States"    submitted    to
     Advances in Environ. Sci. and Tech., Vol. 12.

Zeman,  0.,  (1979):    "Parameterization  of  the  Dynamics  of  Stable  Boundary
     Layers and Nocturnal Jets", J. Atmos. Sci.. Vol. 36, pp 792-804.

Zilitinkevich,  S.  S.,  (1972):   "On  the Determination  of  the Height  of the
     Ekman Boundary-Layer", Boundary Layer Meteor., Vol. 3, pp 141-145.
                                    297

-------
TECHNICAL REPORT DATA
(Please read Instructions on the reverse before completing)
1. REPORT NO.
4. TITLE AND SUBTITLE
A REGIONAL SCALE (1000 KM)
AIR POLLUTION Part 2. Inp
2.
MODEL OF PHOTOCHEMICAL
Lit Processor Network Design
7. AUTHORIS)
Robert G. Lamb
9. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION NAME AND ADDRESS
Same as Block 12

12. SPONSORING AGENCY NAME AND ADDRESS
Environmental Sciences Research Laboratory— RTP, NC
Office of Research and Development
Environmental Protection Agency
Research Triangle Park, North Carolina 27711
3. RECIPIENT'S ACCESSION-NO.
5. REPORT DATE
6. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION
8. PERFORMING ORGANIZATION
CODE
REPORT
10. PROGRAM ELEMENT NO.
CDVIA1A/02-1335 (FY-84)
11. CONTRACT/GRANT NO.
13. TYPE OF REPORT AND PERIOD COVEF
In-house
14. SPONSORING AGENCY CODE
EPA/600/09
16. SUPPLEMENTARY NOTES
16. ABSTRACT
       Detailed specifications are given for a network of data processors and submode
  that can  generate the parameter fields required by the regional oxidant model for-
  mulated in Part 1 of this report.   Operations performed by the processor network
  include simulation of the motion and depth of the nighttime radiation inversion la>
  simulation of the depth of the convective mixed and cloud layers; estimation of the
  synoptic-scale vertical motion fields; generation of ensembles of layer-averaged
  horizontal winds; calculation of vertical turbulence fluxes, pollutant deposition
  velocities, parameters for a subgrid-scale concentration fluctuation parameter!'zati
  scheme; and many other functions.   This network of processors and submodels, in
  combination with the core model developed in Part 1, represent the EPA's first-
  generation regional oxidant model.
17. KEY WORDS AND DOCUMENT ANALYSIS
a. DESCRIPTORS

13. DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT
RELEASE TO PUBLIC
b.lDENTIFIERS/OPEN ENDED TERMS

19. SECURITY CLASS (This Report)
UNCLASSIFIED
20. SECURITY CLASS (This page}
UNCLASSIFIED
c. COSATI Field/Group

21. NO. OF PAGES
22. PRICE
EPA Form 2220-1 (9-73)

-------